2005 Accord Hybrid Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Instruments and Controls................................................................................................................. 51
Indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column.
Features .............................................................................................................................................. 99
Climate, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, and HomeLink.
Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 151
Fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading.
Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 165
Engine and transmission operation.
Maintenance..................................................................................................................................... 189
Schedules, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage.
Taking Care of the Unexpected...................................................................................................... 229
Flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses.
Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 257
Vehicle specifications, tires, fuels, and emissions controls.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada)................................................................ 271
Warranty and contact information.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 275
How to order.
Index..................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
Fluid capacities and tire pressures.
Driver and Passenger Safety ............................................................................................................ 7
Seat belts, SRS, and child protection.
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety................................................................................................................ ii
Your Vehicle at a Glance................................................................................................................... 4
Main Controls
Owner's Identification Form
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
This Owner’s Manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This Owner’s Manual covers all models of
theAccordHybrid.Youmayfind
descriptions of equipment and features that
are not on your particular model.
Owner’s Identification
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur en
français, veuillez demander à votre
concessionnaire de commander le
numéro de pièce 33SDRC00 .
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１４：００ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０００１
Main Menu
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains
or emits chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or
more recording devices commonly
referred to as event data recorders
or sensing and diagnostic modules.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2005 Honda Accord Hybrid was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff
is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.
Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer
any questions and concerns.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
Introduction
WARNING:
i
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１４：０８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０００２
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
These signal words mean:
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
on the vehicle.
AFewWordsAboutSafety
Safety Messages
Safety Headings
Safety Section
Instructions
Safety Labels
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
ii
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１４：２１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０００３
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
4
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
MIRROR CONTROLS
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
GAUGES
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
AUDIO SYSTEM
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
AIRBAGS
(P.11, 23)
INDICATORS
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE LEVER
(P.63)
(P.53)
(P.112)
(P.100)
(P.168)
(P.97)
(P.154)
(P.84)
(P.153)
(P.90)
(P.80)
(P.89)
POWER DOOR LOCK
SWITCHES
０４／１０／３０ ０９：５５：４０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０００７
Main Menu
＊
＊ Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Your Vehicle at a Glance
5
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
VOICE CONTROL
SWITCHES
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM HORNSTEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
CRUISE CONTROLS
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
HAZARD
WARNING BUTTON
(P.74)
(P.71)
(P.142)
(P.75, 103, 106)
(P.76)
(P.179)
(P.138)
(P.72)
(P.75)
０５／０１／０６ １８：１２：５４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０００８
Main Menu
6
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１５：１０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０００９
Main Menu
−
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 8
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 9
.....................................Seat Belts . 10
.........................................Airbags . 11
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 15
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
.....................................Belts . 16
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 17
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
Additional Information About Your
.................................Seat Belts . 20
..Seat Belt System Components . 20
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20
........ 21
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 21
Additional Information About Your
.....................................Airbags . 23
......Airbag System Components . 23
......... 24
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 26
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 27
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 28
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 28
.............................Airbag Service . 29
...Additional Safety Precautions . 30
Protecting Children General
................................Guidelines . 31
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 31
All Children Should Sit in a
.................................Back Seat . 32
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 32
..........................................Infants . 32
.............................Small Children . 32
..........................Larger Children . 32
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 34
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 34
...Additional Safety Precautions . 35
Protecting Infants and
.........................Small Children . 36
.......................Protecting Infants . 36
.........Protecting Small Children . 37
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 38
....................Installing a Child Seat . 39
Installing a Child Seat with
.....................................LATCH . 40
...........Protecting Larger Children . 45
...Additional Safety Precautions . 48
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 49
...................................Safety Labels . 50
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
How Your Front Airbags Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
7
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１５：１６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００１０
Main Menu
−
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page ).
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page ).
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat. Infants and small children
should be restrained in a child seat.
Larger children should use a booster
and a lap/shoulder belt until they
canusethebeltproperlywithouta
booster (see pages ).
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
16
34 48
191
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Control Your Speed
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Restrain All Children
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
Don’t Drink and Drive
8
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１５：２７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００１１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
The following pages explain how you
cantakeanactiveroleinprotecting
yourself and your passengers.
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment; front and rear crush
zones; a collapsible steering column;
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and
. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
always wear
your seat belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3) (4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(7)
(10)
(11)
(9)
(8)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Door Locks
(11) Seat Belt Tensioners
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１５：３５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００１２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Your seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your seat
belts.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.
Seat Belts
Why Wear Seat Belts
What You Should Do:
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
10
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１５：４９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００１３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Your vehicle has side airbags to help
protect the upper torso of the driver
or a front seat passenger during a
moderate to severe side impact (see
page for more information on how
your side airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side curtain
airbags to help protect the heads of
the driver, front passenger, and
passengers in the outer rear seating
positions during a moderate to
severe side impact (see page for
more information on how your side
curtain airbags work).
24
27
26
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
０５／０１／０６ １８：１３：０１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００１４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
To do
their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So while
airbags help save lives, they can
cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags can pose hazards.
What you should do:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor f rontal or side
collisions.
12
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１６：０５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００１５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
CONTINUED
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
See pages for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed
and locked.
See page for how to lock the
doors, and page for how the door
monitor indicator works.
Your vehicle has a door
monitor indicator on the
instrument panel to indicate when a
specific door or the trunk is not
tightly closed.
34 48
80
56
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction Adjust the Front Seats
Close and Lock the Doors1.
2.
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１６：１７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００１６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel in and out (see page
). Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
See page for how to adjust the
front seats.
76
86
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
14
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
０５／０１／０６ １８：１３：０９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００１７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the back of your head rests against
the center of the restraint.
Have passengers with adjustable
head restraints adjust their restraints
properly as well. Taller persons
should adjust their restraint as high
as possible.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints.
See page for how to adjust the
seat-backs.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
88
86
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
０５／０１／０６ １８：１３：１７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００１８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
16
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１６：４６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００１９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
See page for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, press and hold the release
buttons and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
20
CONTINUED
Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt.
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
RELEASE
BUTTONS
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１６：５７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００２０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Advice for Pregnant Women
18
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１７：０５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００２１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
thebeltandincreasethechanceof
serious injury in a crash.
If a side airbag
or a side curtain airbag inflates, a
cupholderorotherhardobject
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a f ront door.
Additional Safety Precautions
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１７：１２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００２２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all five seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you to fasten your seat belt.
If you turn the ignition switch to ON
(II) before fastening your belt, the
beeper will sound and the indicator
will flash.
The lap and shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, push the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have an additional
locking mechanism that must be
activated to secure a child seat (see
page ).
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the locking
mechanism will activate. The belt
will retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
let the seat belt fully retract. To
refasten the seat belt, pull it out only
as far as needed.
If you continue driving without
fastening your seat belt, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
If you do not fasten your seat belt
before the beeper stops, the
indicator will stop flashing but
remain on.
16
42
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt
20
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１７：２４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００２３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
The tensioners are designed to
activate primarily in frontal collisions,
andtheyshouldactivateinany
collision severe enough to cause
front-airbag inflation.
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. Any belt that
is not in good condition or working
properly will not provide good
protection and should be replaced as
soon as possible.
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags . In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
Honda provides a lifetime warranty
on seat belts for U.S. models. See
your
booklet for details.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled in the normal
manner.
do not deploy
Honda Warranty Information
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt MaintenanceAutomatic Seat Belt Tensioners
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
０５／０１／１１ １１：４１：３０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００２４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
For information on how to clean your
seat belts, see page .216
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
22
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
０４／１１／２３ ０８：４２：２９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００２５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your airbag system includes:
Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG.’’
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition is in ON (II).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
Automatic seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact,
or side impact in models with side
airbags.
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
).
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Sensors that can detect whether
a child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and automatically
turn the airbag off (see page
).
27
21
28
26
25
27
Airbag System Components
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
０４／１０／０６ １８：３７：２１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００２６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After inflating, the front airbags will
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.
How Your Front Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
24
０５／０１／０６ １８：１３：２５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００２７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your front airbags are also dual-
threshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
or not the occupant is wearing a seat
belt.
If the occupant’s belt is ,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
It the occupant’s belt is , the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
In a crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
Dual-Threshold Airbags
not latched
latched
Dual-Stage Airbags
more severe
less severe
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１８：０８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００２８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid deceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
To reduce the risk of injury from an
inflating side airbag, your vehicle has
an automatic cutoff system for the
passenger’s side airbag.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, this system
is designed to shut off the side
airbag if a child leans sideways and
the child’s head is in the side airbag
deployment path.
Thesideairbagmayalsoshutoffifa
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Airbags Work
Side Airbag Cutoff System
26
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１８：１８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００２９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
pathandwhentheindicatorcomes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid deceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
28
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
０５／０１／０６ １８：１３：３２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００３０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), this indicator will come on
briefly then go out. This tells you the
system is working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II).
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashesonandoffwhileyoudrive.
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.
This indicator
alerts you that the
passenger’s side
airbag has been automatically shut
off. It does mean there is a
problem with your side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the indicator should light
briefly and go out (see page ). If it
doesn’t light, stays on, or comes on
while driving without a passenger in
the front seat, have the system
checked.
55
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the SRS Indicator Works How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works
not
28
CanadaU.S.
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１８：３９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００３１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Take your vehicle to an
authorized your dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor and the front
passenger’s weight sensors to
make sure they are operating
properly.
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. If a
front airbag inflates, the seat belt
tensioners must also be replaced.
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by your dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact.
An airbag ever inflates.
Airbag Service
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１８：４６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００３２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
Additional Safety Precautions
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting
your dealer.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
30
０５／０１／０６ １８：１３：３７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００３３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children ages 12 and
under.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
(see pages ).
(see pages ).
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to protect child
passengers.
36 44
45 48
properly
All Children Must Be Restrained
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１９：０２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００３４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page for important
information about protecting larger
children).
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and
Transport Canada recommend that
all children age 12 and under be
properly restrained in a back seat.
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
45
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inf lating passenger’s
front airbag.
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks
Protecting Children General Guidelines
32
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１９：１２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００３５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboard
(U.S. model) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
U.S. Model:
Canadian Model:
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
SUN VISOR
SUN VISOR
DASHBOARD
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１９：２６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００３６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual
contact, we strongly recommend
that another adult ride with the
child in a back seat. The back seat
is far safer for a child than the
front.
16
16
13
45
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Protecting Children General Guidelines
34
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１９：３７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００３７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
This can prevent children
from accidentally falling out (see
page ).
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
For example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition can accidentally set the
vehicle in motion, possibly injuring
themselves or others.
Children
who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles. Know how to
operate the emergency trunk
opener and decide if your children
should be shown how to use this
feature(seepage ).
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the trunk, which
can lead to accidental injury or
death.
81
85
Additional Safety Precautions
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt.
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Use childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
doors.
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle.
Lock all doors and the trunk when
your vehicle is not in use.
Keep vehicle keys and remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
０５／０１／０６ １８：１５：２９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００３８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat and the child is at least
one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving the seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking the
seat-back in the desired position.
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Child Seat Placement
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.
Protecting Infants and Small Children
36
０４／１０／０１ ２２：１９：５８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００３９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
In either situation, we strongly
recommend that you install the child
seat directly behind the front
passenger’s seat, move the seat as
far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat as long as
possible, until the child reaches the
weight or height limit for the seat.
If the vehicle seat is too
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous.
Child Seat Placement
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２０：０９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００４０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
seating positions in the back seat.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
We also recommend selecting a
LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
rather than a flexible, anchor (see
page ).
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
compatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle, and the
child is properly strapped in the seat. Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-
facing for small children.
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) system.
1.
2.
40
Selecting a Child Seat
The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
38
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２０：１９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００４１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After selecting a proper child seat,
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position, or positions,
where the seat will be used.
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
facing child seats.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Secure the child in the child seat.
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２０：２９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００４２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connection as
shown above.
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children) at the outer
rear seats.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
1.
2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Installing a Child Seat
40
Rigid type
LOWERANCHORMARKS
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２０：４０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００４３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connection as
shown above.
Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
Lift the head restraint (see page
), then route the tether strap
through the legs of the head
restraint, over the seat-back,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.
4.
5.
6.
7.
88
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
TETHER STRAP HOOK
Flexible type
ANCHOR
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２０：４９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００４４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
thebeltout,itisnotlocked,and
you will need to repeat these steps.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a locking mechanism
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. 2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
Installing a Child Seat
42
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２０：５７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００４５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
4. 5.
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２１：０５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００４６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat, using one of the
anchorage points shown above.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), lift the head
restraint, then route the tether
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), route the
tether strap over the seat-back.
Followsteps2and3fromthe
previous column.Lift the anchor cover, then attach
the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
40 42
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Using an Outer Anchor Using the Center Anchor
Installing a Child Seat
44
TETHER STRAP HOOK
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS
TETHER STRAP HOOK
ANCHOR
ANCHOR
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２１：１８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００４７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.
Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
1.
2.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２１：２６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００４８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Some states also require children to
use a booster seat until they reach a
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
60 lbs). Be sure to check current
laws in the state or states where you
intend to drive.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster meets federal
safety standards (see page ) and
that you follow the booster seat
maker’s instructions.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far to the rear as possible,
and be sure the child is wearing the
seat belt properly.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of the ears are
even with the top of the seat-back. A
child of this height should be tall
enough to use the lap/shoulder belt
without a booster.
4.
5.
3.
38
Using a Booster Seat
Protecting Larger Children
46
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２１：３９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００４９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see page ). If the seat
belt does not fit properly, with or
without the child sitting on a booster
seat, the child should not sit in front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
45
Physical Size
Maturity
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２１：５０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００５０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Larger Children
48
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２１：５６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００５１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. You should
have no problem with carbon
monoxide entering the vehicle in
normal driving if you maintain your
vehicle properly.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
With the trunk open, airflow can pull
exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
trunk open, open all the windows and
set the climate control system as
shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the climate
control system as follows:
Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２２：０５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００５２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully. If
a label comes off or becomes hard to
read, contact your dealer for a
replacement.
Canadian models
U.S. model
U.S. model onlyU.S. model
U.S. model Canadian model
Canadian model
Safety Labels
50
SUN VISOR
HOOD
DOORJAMBS
RADIATOR
CAP
DASHBOARD
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２２：４５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００５３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 52
............................Instrument Panel . 53
................Instrument Panel Lights . 54
.............................................Gauges . 63
Controls Near the Steering
.......................................Wheel . 70
..................Wipers and Washers . 71
.......Turn Signal and Headlights . 72
Automatic Lighting Off
.....................................Feature . 73
............Daytime Running Lights . 74
....Instrument Panel Brightness . 74
..........................Hazard Warning . 74
.............Rear Window Defogger . 75
......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 76
...............................Keys and Locks . 77
........................Immobilizer System . 78
................................Ignition Switch . 79
......................................Door Locks . 80
..................Childproof Door Locks . 81
.......................Remote Transmitter . 81
................................................Trunk . 84
........Emergency Trunk Opener . 85
............................................Armrest . 85
....................................Seat Heaters . 86
...................................................Seat . 86
.......Adjusting the Driver’s Seat . 86
...........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 87
Adjusting the Passenger’s
...........................................Seat . 87
..........................Head Restraints . 88
.............................................Mirrors . 89
....Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 89
................Power Mirror Heaters . 90
..............................Power Windows . 90
.................................Parking Brake . 93
..........................................Sun Visor . 94
..................................Vanity Mirror . 94
.................................Interior Lights . 95
...........Interior Convenience Items . 96
.......................Beverage Holders . 96
..........Accessory Power Sockets . 97
...............Console Compartment . 97
.......................Center CD Pocket . 97
......................Sunglasses Holder . 98
....................................Glove Box . 98
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
51
０５／０１／０６ １８：１５：３３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００５４
Main Menu
Control Locations
52
POWER DOOR LOCK
SWITCHES
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
MIRROR CONTROLS
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
AUDIO SYSTEM
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
CRUISE CONTROLS
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
INDICATORS
GAUGES
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE LEVER
(P.53)
(P.63)
(P.89)
(P.80)
(P.90)
(P.153)
(P.154)
(P.97)
(P.100)
(P.112)
(P.142)
(P.84)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.168)
(P.75)
０５／０１／０６ １８：１５：３９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００５５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
Instrument Panel
Instruments and Controls
53
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR
DOOR AND TRUNK
OPEN MONITOR
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
AUTO IDLE STOP INDICATOR
ECPS INDICATOR
SECURITY SYSTEM
INDICATOR
TCS ACTIVATION INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
SEAT BELT REMINDER
LIGHT
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.54) ABS INDICATOR (P.55)
(P.56)
(P.59)
TCS INDICATOR (P.56)
(P.59)
(P.61)
(P.56)
(P.55)
(P.55)
(P.54)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.54)
LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.57)
(P.58)
(P.60)
IMA SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.60)
(P.60)
(P.57)
(P.54)
(P.54)
(P.58)
CRUISE CONTROL
MAIN INDICATOR (P.59)
FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR (P.62)
０４／１０／３０ ０９：５６：０８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００５６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page .
See page .
This indicator has two functions:This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (II). It
reminds you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts. A beeper also
sounds if you have not fastened your
seat belt.
If you turn the ignition switch to ON
(II) before fastening your seat belt,
the beeper sounds and the indicator
flashes. If you do not fasten your
seat belt before the beeper stops, the
indicator stops flashing but remains
on.
If you continue driving without
fastening your seat belt, the beeper
sounds and the indicator flashes
again at regular intervals.
Itcomesonwhenyouturnthe
ignition switch to ON (II). It is a
reminder to check the parking
brake. A beeper sounds if you try
to drive with the parking brake not
fully released. Driving with the
parking brake not fully released
can damage the brakes and tires.
If it remains lit after you fully
release the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page .
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page .
1.
2.
246
247
247
249
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Parking Brake and Brake
System IndicatorSeat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
54
U.S. Canada
０５／０１／０６ １８：１５：４９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００５７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II), and when
the ignition switch is turned to
START (III). If it comes on at any
other time, there is a problem with
theABS.Ifthishappens,haveyour
vehicle checked at a dealer. With
this on, your vehicle still has normal
braking ability but no anti-lock
brakes. For more information, see
page .
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (II). If
it comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For more information, see page .
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(II). If it comes on at any other time,
it indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags. This indicator will
also alert you to a potential problem
with your side airbags, side curtain
airbags, and automatic seat belt
tensioners. For more information,
see page .
28
178
28
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) IndicatorSide Airbag Off
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
55
U.S.
Canada
０５／０１／０６ １８：１５：５７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００５８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The appropriate indicator comes on
in this monitor if the trunk or either
door is not closed tightly.
All the indicators in the monitor
come on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
This indicator has three functions:
Itcomesonasareminderthatyou
have turned off the traction
control system (TCS).
It flashes when the TCS is
regulating wheelspin.
Ifitcomesonandstaysonwhen
the TCS is on, it indicates that
there is a problem in the TCS.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). If it comes
on and stays on when the Traction
Control System (TCS) is on, there is
a problem with the TCS. For more
information on the TCS, see page
.
This indicator also comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). If it comes
on and stays on at any other time, or
it does not come on when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II), there
is a problem with the TCS. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have it
checked. See page for more
information on the TCS.
1.
2.
3.
180
180
Door and Trunk Open MonitorTraction Control System
(TCS) Indicator
TCS Activation Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
56
０５／０１／０６ １８：１６：０７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００５９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
WhenyouturnontheHazard
Warning button, both turn signal
indicators blink. All turn signals on
the outside of the vehicle should
flash.
This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you must refuel soon.
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If the indicators do not blink,
or if they blink rapidly, it usually
means one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see page ). Replace
the bulb as soon as possible, since
other drivers cannot see that you are
signaling.
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or position. If you turn the
ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I)
or LOCK (0) without turning off the
light switch, this indicator will
remain on. A reminder chime will
also sound when you open the driver’s
door.
217
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Lights On Indicator Low Fuel Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
57
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
０５／０１／０６ １８：１６：１３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００６０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (II)
with the headlight switch off and the
parking brake set. It should go off if
youturnontheheadlightsorrelease
the parking brake. If it comes on at
any other time, it means there is a
problem with the DRL. There may
also be a problem with the high
beam headlights.
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. See page
for more information on the
security system.
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page .
This indicator also comes on with
reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on
(see page ).
141
73
74
Canadian model only
On Canadian model
Security System Indicator ‘‘Daytime Running
Lights’’ Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
58
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
０５／０１／０６ １８：１６：２０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００６１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the Cruise Control Master
Button. (see page .)
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
for information on operating the
cruise control.
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II). It will go off if you
have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly-
coded key, the indicator will blink
and the engine will not start (see
page ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluidwhenyouseethisindicator
come on (see page ).
142
142
78
205
Canadian model only
Cruise Control Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Washer Level IndicatorCruise Control Main
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
59
０５／０１／０６ １８：１６：３０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００６２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your fuel cap is loose or missing, a
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears as text in the odometer/
outside temperature display after
you start the engine. Turn the
engine off and confirm the fuel cap is
installed. If it is, loosen the cap, then
retighten it at least 3 clicks. When
you restart the engine, the message
appears again. To clear, press and
hold the Trip/Reset button until the
message is replaced by the
odometer/outside temperature
display.
This indicator normally comes on
when you turn the ignition to ON (II)
and goes off after the engine starts.
If it comes on at any other time,
there is a problem in the Electric
Power Steering system. If this
happens, stop the vehicle in a safe
place and turn off the engine. Reset
the system by restarting the engine.
The indicator will not turn off
immediately. If it does not go off
after driving a short distance, or
comes back on again while driving,
take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. With the indicator
on, the EPS may be turned off,
making the vehicle harder to steer.
If the power steering system
overheats while driving, the assisting
power is reduced and steering may
feel slightly harder.
If you drive with the system
overheated continuously or
repeatedly, this can damage the
power steering system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). If it comes
on at any other time, it indicates a
problem in the Integrated Motor
Assist (IMA) system. With the IMA
indicator on, the vehicle may not
accelerate as it normally does. Have
the vehicle checked by the dealer as
soon as possible.
See page .174
Check Fuel Cap DisplayElectric Power Steering
(EPS) Indicator
IMA System Indicator
Auto Idle Stop Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
60
０５／０１／０６ １８：１６：３９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００６３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
If the system still detects a loose or
missing fuel fill cap, the malfunction
indicator lamp (MIL) comes on.
Turn the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap at least 3
clicks. The MIL goes out after 3 days
of normal driving once the cap is
tightened or replaced. If it does not
go out, have your dealer inspect the
vehicle. For more information, see
page .
The indicator comes on for 2
seconds each time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
Each time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, the
indicator comes on for 2 seconds,
and then flashes for 10 seconds.
The indicator is on when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position.
Refer to the maintenance schedules
on pages and for information
on vehicle maintenance.
247
194 195
If the travel distance is 6,000
7,500 miles (9,600 12,000 km) after
the last reset
If the travel distance is 0 6,000 miles
(0 9,600 km) after the last reset
If the travel distance is over 7,500 miles
(12,000 km) after the last reset
Maintenance Required Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
61
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED INDICATOR
０５／０１／０６ １８：１６：４７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００６４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
While the engine is operating in its
most economical range, this
indicator may come on and stay on.
After having your vehicle serviced,
ask your dealer if the system has
been reset. If it has not, reset it as
follows:
Turn off the engine.
Press and hold the Select/Reset
knob in the instrument panel, then
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Hold the knob for about 10
seconds until the indicator resets.
1.
2.
3.
Fuel Economy Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
62
SELECT/RESET KNOB
０５／０１／０６ １８：１６：５４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００６５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
63
IMA BATTERY LEVEL GAUGE
SELECT/RESET KNOBTRIP METER
U.S. model is shown.
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
CHARGE/ASSIST GAUGE
FUEL GAUGE
SPEEDOMETERTACHOMETER
ODOMETER/OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
０４／１０／３０ ０９：５６：４４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００６６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.
This display shows the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Centigrade (Canadian
models). To see the outside
temperature, press and release the
Select/Reset knob until the
temperature is displayed.
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road
surface, engine heat, and the
exhaust from surrounding traffic.
This can cause an incorrect
temperature reading when your
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
The sensor delays the display update
until it reaches the correct outside
temperature. This may take several
minutes.
Gauges
Odometer Outside Temperature Display
64
０５／０１／０６ １８：１７：００ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００６７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
±±
−−−−
− −−−
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays and the odometer/outside
temperature display by pressing the
Select/Reset knob repeatedly. Each
trip meter works independently, so
you can keep track of two different
distances.
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up to 5°F ( 3°C) warmer or
cooler.
NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
Select the outside temperature
display, then press the Select/Reset
knob for 10 seconds. The following
sequences appear, 1 second at a
time:0,1,2,3,4,5, 5, 4, 3, 2,
1, 0, 1 (0, 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 1, 0, 1).
When the temperature reaches the
desired value, release the Select/
Reset knob. You should see the new
outside temperature displayed.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), what you last selected is
displayed.
To reset a trip meter, display it and
then press and hold the Select/Reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0.’’
Both trip meters will reset if the
vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected.
Trip Meter
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
65
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２４：５８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００６８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When a trip meter is displayed, the
average fuel mileage you have been
getting during that trip is shown in
the Fuel Mileage display. This
number is updated once every ten
seconds.
When you reset a trip meter, the
average fuel mileage for that trip
meter also resets.
You can temporarily turn off the Trip
Mileage display.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II)
and make sure the transmission is
in Park and the parking brake is
set.
Use the Select/Reset button to
select the odometer display.
Press and hold the Select/Reset
button for about 5 to 10 seconds,
then release it. The Trip Mileage
display will turn off.
The display will turn back on when
you repeat the same procedure in
step 3.
It shows the number of mpg (U.S.)
or l/100 km (Canada).1.
2.
3.
Instruments and Controls
Gauges
Trip Mileage Turning Off the Trip Mileage
Display
66
TRIP METER
０４／１０／３０ ０９：５６：５６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００６９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This gauge shows you the state of
charge of the battery for the
Integrated Motor Assist (IMA). This
battery is recharged by the engine,
anddischargedbytheIMAwhenit
is assisting the engine with powering
the vehicle.
The gauge reading may drop near
the bottom under driving conditions
that require assist for a long time,
such as prolonged acceleration or
climbing a long hill. The engine will
recharge the battery as you continue
driving.
The battery level gauge does not
read the battery level directly. It
calculates the level by continuously
measuring the current flow, voltage,
and temperature.
Since the level is not read directly,
small sensing errors can, over time,
cause the gauge to read higher than
the actual battery level. The system
will then perform a correction, and
the battery level gauge reading will
drop suddenly. When this happens,
IMA assist and Auto Idle Stop are
disabled until the IMA battery is
sufficiently recharged by normal
driving. This should take only a few
minutes.
This correction of the battery level
gauge is normal and does not
indicate a problem. If the IMA
battery develops a problem or
becomes deteriorated, the IMA
system indicator will come on. If this
happens, have the vehicle checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
If the battery is mostly discharged,
the Auto Idle Stop function is
disabled (see page ).173
IMA Battery Level Gauge
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
67
IMA BATTERY LEVEL GAUGE
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２５：１７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００７０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the IMA battery is too hot or too
cold, the IMA system shuts down to
protect the battery. This disables the
IMA assist and Auto Idle Stop, even
though the Battery Level Gauge may
show that the battery is well-charged.
Therefore, those functions may not
operate when you first start driving
in very hot or cold weather.
The battery temperature will
normalize after a few minutes of
driving, and the IMA system will
work normally.
This gauge shows you the status of
the Integrated Motor Assist (IMA).
When the IMA battery is being
charged, the left side of the gauge
illuminates. When the IMA is
assisting the engine, the right side of
the gauge illuminates.
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the reading should be in
the middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the reading may reach near
the red mark. If it reaches the red
(Hot) mark, pull safely to the side of
the road. See page for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system.
244
Charge/Assist Gauge Temperature Gauge
Gauges
68
CHARGE/ASSIST GAUGE
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２５：２５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００７１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.
Fuel Gauge
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
69
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２５：２９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００７２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊ Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.:
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
70
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
VOICE CONTROL
SWITCHES
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM HORNSTEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
CRUISE CONTROLS
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
HAZARD
WARNING BUTTON
(P.74)
(P.71)
(P.142)
(P.76)
(P.179)
(P.138)
(P.72)
(P.75, 103, 106)
(P.75)
０５／０１／０６ １８：１７：０５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００７３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
MIST
OFF
INT Intermittent
LO Low speed
HI High speed
Windshield Washers
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
The wipers are not activated.
The wipers run at low speed.
The wipers run at high speed.
The length of the wiper
interval is varied automatically
according to the vehicle’s speed.
Vary the delay by turning the INT
TIME ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay, the wipers will
change to low speed operation when
the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph
(20 km/h).
Pull the
wiper control lever toward you and
hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
low speed, then complete one more
sweep after you release the lever.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Windshield Wiper
MIST
OFF
LO
HI
INT
Windshield Washer
Wipers and Washers
Instruments and Controls
71
０４／１０／３０ ０９：５７：１２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００７４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
Turn Signal
Off
Parking and interior lights
Headlight on
High beams
Flashhighbeams
Push down on the
left lever to signal a left turn and up
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever in
the proper direction and hold it. The
lever will return to center when you
release it or complete a turn.
Turning the switch
on the left lever to the position
turns on the parking lights, taillights,
instrument panel lights, side-marker
lights, and rear license plate lights.
Turning the switch to the
position turns on the
headlights. If you leave the lights on
with the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0), you
will hear a reminder chime when you
open the driver’s door.
When the light switch is in either of
these positions, the Lights On
indicator comes on as a reminder.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal Headlights
Turn Signal, Headlights
72
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２５：５２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００７５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If you remove the key from the
ignition switch with the headlight
switch on, but do not open the door
and get out, the lights will turn off
after 10 minutes.
The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
will go off. With the driver’s door
open, you will hear a lights-on
reminder chime.
To turn on the high
beams, push the lever forward until
you hear a click. The blue high beam
indicator will come on (see page ).
To turn off the high beams, pull the
lever back. To flash the high beams,
pull the lever farther back, and then
release it. The high beams remain on
until the lever is released.
This feature turns off the headlights,
parking lights, taillights, and license
plate light within 15 seconds of
removing the key from the ignition
switch and closing the driver’s door.
This feature activates if you leave
the headlight switch in the or
position, remove the key, then
open and close the driver’s door.
58
Automatic Lighting Off FeatureHigh Beams
Headlights, Automatic Lighting Off Feature
Instruments and Controls
73
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２６：００ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００７６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position and release the
parking brake, the high beam
headlights and the high beam
indicator come on at reduced
brightness if the headlight switch is
off.
The daytime running lights are off
when the headlight switch is in the
or position.
The Select/Reset knob on the
instrument panel controls the
brightness of the instrument panel
lights. Turn the knob to adjust the
brightness.
The instrument panel will illuminate
with reduced brightness when you
unlock and open the driver’s door.
The brightness will increase slightly
when you insert the key in the
ignitionswitch,thengotonormal
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II).
If you do not insert the key in the
ignition switch after opening the
driver’s door, the illumination turns
off in about 30 seconds.
If you insert the key but do not turn
the ignition switch to ON (II), the
illumination turns off in about 10
seconds.
Instrument Panel BrightnessDaytime Running Lights
(Canadian Model)
Daytime Running Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness
74
SELECT/RESET KNOB
０５／０１／０６ １８：１７：１３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００７７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before driving, make sure the rear
window is clear.
The rear window is equipped with
defogger wires. The wires are
attached from inside the vehicle. To
clean the rear window, wipe it from
side to side to prevent the wires from
being damaged.
Turn on this defogger to defog or
de-ice the rear window. The
indicatoronthebuttonisonwhen
the defogger is on. The defogger
turns off when you turn off the
engine.
Press the hazard warning button if
you need to bring your vehicle to an
emergency stop, or if it is disabled.
When you press the button, the turn
signal lights and the turn signal
indicators blink.
Hazard Warning, Rear Window Defogger
Rear Window DefoggerHazard Warning
Instruments and Controls
75
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
０５／０１／０６ １８：１７：２０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００７８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
Insert the key in the ignition
switch, and unlock the steering
column.
Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out to the desired
position. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
the indicator lights.
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in that position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
76
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２６：２５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００７９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the door
locks. You can keep the trunk
release handle, rear seat trunk
access, and glove box locked when
you leave your vehicle and the valet
key at a parking facility.
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
Immobilizer System. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
Steering Wheel Adjustment, Keys and Locks
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
77
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
VALET KEY
(LIGHT GREY)
MASTER
KEYS WITH
REMOTE
TRANSMITER
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２６：３３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００８０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undriveable.
If you lose your key and you cannot
start the engine, contact your dealer.
The Immobilizer System protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine will not
start.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the Immobilizer System
indicator should come on for a few
seconds, then go out. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert
it, and turn the switch to ON (II)
again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Immobilizer System
78
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２６：４２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００８１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), START (III)
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, the shift lever must
be in Park, and you must push the
key in slightly. If the front wheels
are turned, the anti-theft lock may
make it difficult to turn the key.
Firmly turn the steering wheel to the
left or to the right as you turn the
key.
You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
lights on the instrument panel come
on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from ACCESSORY
(I) to ON (II).
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to ON (II) when you let go of
the key.
A reminder beeper sounds if the
ignition switch is in the the LOCK
(0) or ACCESSORY(I) position when
you open the driver’s door. Remove
the key from the ignition switch to
turn off the beeper.
Before removing the key from the
ignition switch, make sure the shift
lever is in the Park position.
Ignition Switch
LOCK (0)
ACCESSORY (I)
ON (II)
START (III)
Instruments and Controls
79
０５／０１／０６ １８：１８：４３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００８２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Each front door has a master door
lock switch. Either switch locks and
unlocks all doors. Push the top of the
switch to lock all doors; push the
bottom to unlock them.
To lock any passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, push the
lock tab down, and close the door.
Only the driver’s door has a door
lock.
Insert your key into the door lock
and turn it counterclockwise once to
lock the driver’s door and the other
doors.
Insert your key into the door lock
and turn it clockwise once to unlock
the driver’s door. Turn the key back
and turn it clockwise again to unlock
the other doors.
With the driver’s door open and the
key in the ignition, both door lock
switches are disabled. They are not
disabled if the driver’s door is closed.
Pushing the switch down on the
open passenger’s door will lock all
doors.
Lockout Prevention
Door Locks
80
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
top
bottom
０５／０１／０６ １８：１８：５０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００８３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
You can open and close all power
windows from outside the vehicle
with the key. With the remote
transmitter, you can open the
windows. Refer to Power Windows
on page .
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the center position) will
come on when you press the
UNLOCK button. If you do not open
any door, the light stays on for about
30 seconds, then fades out. If you
relock the doors with the remote
transmitter before 30 seconds have
elapsed, the light will go off
immediately.
Pressthisbuttononce
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the other doors.
Press this button once to
lock all doors. Some exterior and
interior lights will flash. You cannot
lock it if any door is not fully closed
or key is in the ignition switch.
When you push LOCK twice within 5
seconds, you will hear a beep to
verify that the security system has
set.
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. When the
lock lever is pushed down, the door
cannot be opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up, and use the outside door
handle.
90
Remote Transmitter
UNLOCK
Childproof Door Locks
LOCK
Childproof Door Locks, Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
81
LEVER
LOCK
BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
LED
TRUNK
RELEASE
BUTTON
０５／０１／０６ １８：１８：５８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００８４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
You cannot lock the doors with the
remote transmitter if any door is not
fully closed or the key is in the
ignition switch.
If you do not open any door within 30
seconds, the doors automatically
relock and the security system sets.
Pressthisbuttonfor
about 1 second to attract attention;
thehornwillsoundandtheexterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to ON (II).
Press this
button for about 1 second to open
the trunk. You cannot open the trunk
if the key is in the ignition switch.
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Battery type: CR1616
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
Remote Transmitter
PANIC
TRUNK RELEASE
Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Transmitter Battery
82
０５／０１／０６ １８：１９：０７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００８５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
To replace the battery:
Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
Remove the old battery from the
back of the inner cover, and note
the polarity. Make sure the
polarity of the new battery is the
same ( side facing down), then
insert it into the back of the cover.
Install the parts in reverse order.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
83
SCREW
BATTERY
TAB
０５／０１／０６ １８：１９：１６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００８６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Youcanopenthetrunkinanyof
three ways:
Pull up on the trunk release lever
located to the left of the driver’s
seat.
Usethemasterkeytoopenthe
trunk lock. The valet key does not
work in this lock.
Press and hold the trunk release
button on the remote transmitter.
To close the trunk, press down on
the trunk lid.
See page for cargo loading and
weight limit information. Keep the
trunk lid closed at all times while
driving to avoid damaging the lid,
and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See
on page .
Lockthetrunkreleaseleverwith
your master key to prevent someone
from opening the trunk. If they need
to lock/unlock the doors or drive
your vehicle, give them your valet
key.
161
49
Trunk
Carbon
Monoxide Hazard
84
Pull
MASTER KEY
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER
MASTER KEY
０５／０１／０６ １８：１９：２５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００８７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
As a safety feature, your vehicle has
a release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from the
inside.
To open the trunk, push the release
lever to the left.
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature.
To use the console lid as an armrest,
slide it to the desired position.
Make sure the passenger’s hands or
fingersareawayfromthearmrest
before moving it.
Emergency Trunk Opener Armrest
Trunk, Armrest
Instruments and Controls
85
RELEASE LEVER
０５／０１／０６ １８：１９：３２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００８８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
14
13
The controls for the adjustable
driver’s power seat are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. You
can adjust the power seat with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.
Moving the long horizontal switch
adjusts the seat bottom in several
directions. The seat bottom adjusts
in the direction you move the switch.
The short vertical switch adjusts the
seat back angle.
In HI, the heater turns off when the
seat gets warm, and turns back on
after the seat temperature drops.
In LO, the heater runs continuously.
It does not cycle with temperature
changes.
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. Because of the sensors
for the side airbag system, there is
no heater in the passenger’s seat-
back. The ignition switch must be
ON (II) to use the heaters.
After the seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the back of the switch. This will keep
the seat warm.
Seat Heaters, Seats
Adjusting the Driver’s SeatSeat Heaters
86
０５／０１／０６ １８：１９：４２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００８９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To adjust the seat forward and
backward, pull up on the lever under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position and
release the lever. Try to move the
seat to make sure it is locked in
position.
Moves the seat
forward and backward.
Moves the front of the
seat up or down and
the rear of the seat up
or down.
Raises or lowers the
seat.
Adjusts the seat-back
angle forward or
backward.
To change the lumbar support, move
the lever on the right side of the
seat-back forward or backward.
Keep moving the lever forward or
backward until you find a suitable
position.
Seats
Adjusting the Passenger’s SeatDriver’s Lumbar Support
Instruments and Controls
87
０５／０１／０６ １８：１９：５２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００９０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To change the seat-back angle, pull
up on the lever on the outside of the
seat bottom.
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint.
The front and rear head restraints
adjust for height. You need both
hands to adjust the restraint. Do not
attempt to adjust it while driving. To
raise it, pull upward. To lower the
restraint, push the release button
and push the restraint down.
See page for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
15
Seats
Head Restraints
88
RELEASE BUTTON
０５／０１／０６ １８：１９：５９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００９１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving. The outside
mirrors are manually adjustable. The
inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Turn the adjustment knob to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
Push or pull the adjustment knob
right, left, up, or down to move the
mirror.
When you finish, turn the
adjustment knob to the center
(off) position.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
89
TAB
ADJUSTMENT KNOB
０５／０１／０６ １８：２０：０７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００９２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− To open the driver’s
window, push the window switch
firmly down, then release it. To stop
the window from going all the way
down, pull back on the window
switch briefly.
To close the driver’s window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly,
then release it. To stop the window
from going all the way up, push
down on the window switch briefly.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II)
toraiseorloweranywindow.To
open the window, push the switch
downandholdit.Releasetheswitch
when you want the window to stop.
Pull back on the switch and hold it to
close the window.
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
On Canadian model
Power Windows
AUTO
Power Mirror Heaters
Mirrors, Power Windows
90
DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
０５／０１／０６ １８：２０：１４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００９３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If the driver’s
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
driver’s window fuse is removed, the
AUTO function will be disabled. The
power window system needs to be
reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse.
Start the engine. Push down and
hold the driver’s window switch
until the window is fully open.
Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for a second or two more.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
To open or close the driver’s window
partially, push down or pull back on
the window switch lightly and hold it.
The window will stop when you
release the switch.
The passenger windows cannot be
raised or lowered if the MAIN switch
is OFF. Keep the MAIN switch off
whenyouhavechildreninthe
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.
1.
2.
AUTO REVERSE
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
91
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２８：５０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００９４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The power window system has a key-
off delay function. The windows will
stilloperateforupto10minutes
after you turn off the ignition switch.
Opening either front door cancels
the delay function. You must turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) again
before you can raise or lower the
windows.
You can open and close the windows
with the key in the driver’s door lock.
To open:
Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.
You can open all of the windows
from the outside with the remote
transmitter.
Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. The
passenger’s doors unlock, and all
four windows start to open. To
stop the windows, release the
button.
To open the windows further,
press the button again.
You cannot close the windows with
the remote transmitter.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
Opening/Closing the Windows with
the Key
Opening the Windows with the
Remote Transmitter
Power Windows
92
UNLOCK BUTTON
Open
Close
０５／０１／０６ １８：２０：２４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００９５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turnthekeyclockwiseagain,and
hold it. All four windows start to
open. To stop the windows,
release the key.
To open the windows further, turn
andholdthekeyagain.
To close:
Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.
Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. All four
windowsstarttoclose.Tostopthe
windows, release the key.
To close the windows further, turn
andholdthekeyagain.
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake light on
the instrument panel should go out
when the parking brake is fully
released with the engine running
(see page ).
If you drive without fully releasing
the parking brake, the beeper
sounds continuously.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.
4.
54
Parking Brake
Power Windows, Parking Brake
Instruments and Controls
93
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and hubs.
０５／０１／０６ １８：２０：３４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００９６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
You can also use the sun visor at the
side window. Remove the support
rod from the clip and swing the sun
visor toward the side window.
Touseavanitymirroronthebackof
the sun visor, pull up the cover.
The light comes on when you pull up
the cover.
Sun Visor Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror
94
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２９：２１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００９７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
There is a ceiling light on the middle
of the ceiling.
When the switch is in the CENTER
position, the light comes on when
you open any door or unlock the
doors with the key or remote
transmitter. After you close all the
doors tightly, the light dims slightly,
then fades out in about 30 seconds.
There are two ceiling lights on the
front of the ceiling.
Push the light covers to turn the
lights on and off.
The courtesy light comes on when
youturntheparkinglightson.To
adjust its brightness, turn the Select/
Reset knob on the instrument panel.
The courtesy lights in the front
doors and around the ignition switch
come on when you open any door.
After you close the door, the ignition
switch light stays on for several
seconds.
Ceiling Lights Individual Interior Lights
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
95
ON
OFF
COURTESY LIGHT
CENTER
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２９：３１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００９８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage
holders when you close the doors.
Use only resealable containers in the
door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element. When more than one
socket is being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories
should be 120 watts or less
(10 amps).
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
Interior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders
Accessory Power Sockets
96
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
GLOVE BOX
TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKETS
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT and
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
FRONT DOOR POCKET and
BEVERAGE HOLDER
REAR DOOR POCKET and
BEVERAGE HOLDER
COIN POCKET and
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
０５／０１／０６ １８：２０：４１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ００９９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To open the console compartment,
pull up on the right lever and lift the
armrest.
To close, lower the armrest, and
push it down until it latches.
You can put small items in the tray
located in the console compartment
lid. To use the tray, pull up on the
left lever and lift up the armrest.
Thetrayintheconsolecompartment
has a coin holder.
To open the center CD pocket, push-
down on the center of the lid to
unlatch it. It will swing open
automatically.
To close it, push the lid down until it
latches.
This pocket can store up to 12 CDs.
On U.S. model without navigation
system and Canadian model
Interior Convenience Items
Console Compartment Center CD Pocket
Instruments and Controls
97
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
RIGHT LEVER
LEFT LEVER
Push
０５／０１／０６ １８：２０：４９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１００
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the glove box by pulling the
handle to the left. Close it with a firm
push. Lock or unlock the glove box
with the master key.
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the front edge. Make sure the
holder is closed while you are driving.
The glove box light is on when the
parking lights are on.
Sunglasses Holder Glove Box
Interior Convenience Items
98
GLOVE BOX
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：２９：５５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１０１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your heating and air conditioning
system provides a comfortable
environment in all weather
conditions.
Your audio system has many
features. This section describes
them.
The security system helps prevent
your vehicle from being broken into
or being stolen.
.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 100
..........Dual Temperature Control . 109
..............Climate Control Sensors . 111
..........................Playing the Radio . 112
.....................To Play the Radio . 113
....................To Select a Station . 113
.................Adjusting the Sound . 116
....................Radio Frequencies . 117
........................Radio Reception . 117
..................................Playing a CD . 119
..........Playing a CD, CD Changer . 120
.............................To Play a CD . 120
...............To Stop Playing a CD . 123
Removing CDs from the
.................................Changer . 123
Operating the Optional CD
.................................Changer . 124
.........CD Player Error Messages . 125
.....CD Changer Error Messages . 126
.....................Protecting your CDs . 127
.................General Information . 127
..........................Protecting CDs . 127
...............................Playing a Tape . 128
..........................To Play a Tape . 129
............To Stop Playing a Tape . 129
............Tape Search Functions . 130
.....Caring the Tape and Player . 131
Playing the XM Satellite
......................................Radio . 132
...............Satellite Digital Radio . 132
...To Play XM Satellite Radio . 133
..................To Select a Channel . 133
..............Satellite Radio Signals . 135
Receiving Satellite Radio
....................................Service . 136
.............Steering Wheel Controls . 138
.................Radio Theft Protection . 139
..........................Setting the Clock . 140
............................Security System . 141
...............................Cruise Control . 142
HomeLink Universal
................................Transceiver . 145
Features
Features
99
TM
TM
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３０：０１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１０２
Main Menu
Vents, Heating, and A/C
100
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
FAN CONTROL
BUTTONS
AUTO BUTTON
OFF BUTTON
DUAL BUTTON
A/C BUTTON
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
(DRIVER’S SIDE)
FAN SPEED
INDICATOR
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
(PASSENGER’S SIDE)
Without Navigation System
MODE BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３０：０７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１０３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Features
101
AUTO BUTTON
MODE ICONS
A/C BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING ICONS
FAN CONTROL ICONS
DUAL BUTTON
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
BUTTONS (PASSENGER’S SIDE)
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
BUTTONS (DRIVER’S SIDE)
OFF BUTTON
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
With Navigation System (U.S. Vehicles Only)
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３０：１３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１０４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
Without Navigation System
With Navigation System
Without Navigation System
With Navigation System
You can manually select the fan
speed by pressing the fan control
buttons. The fan speed is
represented by vertical bars in the
display.
You can manually select the fan
speed by pressing the A/C button
next to the display and then,
pressing the fan control icons.
Turn the temperature control dial on
the driver’s side to adjust the airflow
temperature on both the driver’s and
passenger’s sides at the same time.
When you press the DUAL button,
the indicator comes on. When it is on,
the airflow temperatures on the
driver’s and passenger’s sides can be
adjusted individually.
Press the temperature control
buttons and on the driver’s side
to adjust the airflow temperature on
both the driver’s and passenger’s
sides at the same time.
When you press the DUAL button,
the indicator comes on. When it is on,
the airflow temperatures on the
driver’s and passenger’s sides can be
adjusted individually.
If temperature display flashes, there
is a problem with the Hybrid-A/C.
Have your vehicle checked by your
dealer as soon as possible.
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Fan Control Temperature Control
102
０４／１１／２３ ０８：４２：４１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１０５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When the recirculation indicator is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (Fresh Air mode).
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page ).
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning on and off. The display
shows ‘‘A/C ON’’ when the air
conditioning is on. The display
shows ‘‘A/C OFF’’ when the air
conditioning is off.
The display shows ‘‘ON’’ and ‘‘OFF’’
after you press the A/C button. The
display shows ‘‘A/C ON’’ after you
touch ‘‘ON’’ to turn the air
conditioning on. The display shows
‘‘A/C OFF’’ after you touch ‘‘OFF’’ to
turn the air conditioning off.
When the A/C is off, the airflow
temperature does not fall below the
outside air temperature. When you
set the airflow temperature lower
than the outside air temperature,
make sure the A/C is on.
75
Without Navigation System
With Navigation System
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Rear Window Defogger Button
Recirculation Button
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Features
103
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３０：３６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１０６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Use the mode control buttons or
icons to select the vents the air flows
from. Some air flows from the
dashboard corner vents in all modes.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
When you select or ,
the system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C. In these modes, the A/C stays
on with the indicator off.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the rear window.
Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Each time you press the MODE
button, the display shows the mode
selected.
Press the A/C button to view the
display, then touch any of the mode
icons on the display.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Without Navigation System
With Navigation System
Mode Control Ventilation
Vents, Heating, and A/C
104
０４／１０／３０ １０：００：３１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１０７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
). If it moves near the red zone,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal.
Press the A/C button, the Manual
Operation A/C screen will appear.
Select the ON icon on the display.
Select the desired temperature
and MODE selections. If the
outside air is humid, select the
Recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select Fresh Air mode.
you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
A/C, and setting the fan to
maximum speed in fresh air mode.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
A/C button.
Make sure the temperature
control dial or button is set to
maximum cool.
Select .
If the outside air is humid, select
Recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Select .
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
Press the A/C button, the manual
operation of A/C screen will
appear.
Select the desired mode and fan
speed icons on the display.
Adjustforwarmthwiththe
temperature buttons ( or ).
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.68
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
If the interior is very warm,
Without Navigation System
Without Navigation System
With Navigation System
With Navigation System
Using the Heater Using the A/C
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Features
105
０５／０１／１１ １１：４１：４０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１０８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
Turn the fan on.
Turn on the air conditioning.
Select and Fresh Air mode.
Adjust the temperature control
dial or buttons to your preference.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
Set the fan to the desired speed or
high for faster defrosting.
Select . When you select
, the system automatically
switches to Fresh Air mode and
turns on the A/C. The A/C
indicator will not come on in U.S.
vehicles.
Set the temperature control dial or
buttons so the airflow feels warm.
Select to help clear the
rear window.
To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the side vents.
When you switch to another mode
from , the A/C stays on.
Press the A/C button to turn it off.
Select . The system
automatically switches to Fresh
Air mode and turns on the A/C.
The A/C ON indicator will not
come on in U.S. vehicles.
Select .
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel below it. This will
send more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select the fresh
air mode to avoid fogging the
windows.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
Vents, Heating, and A/C
106
０４／１０／３０ １０：００：５９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１０９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
▲
▼
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air to raise or lower the
interior temperature to the
temperature you selected.
If you set the temperature to its
lowest limit, (Lo) or its highest limit,
(Hi) the system runs at full cooling
or heating only. It does not regulate
the interior temperature.
In cold weather, the fan will not
come on automatically until the
heater starts to develop warm air.
When
the indicator in the Dual button is on,
the driver’s side and passenger’s side
temperature can be controlled
independently (see page ).
Press the AUTO button.
Set the
desired temperature by turning
the Temperature Control dial. You
will see AUTO in the system’s
display.
Set the
desired temperature by pressing
the to raise the temperature or
to lower the temperature. The
selected temperature will show in
the upper display.
The automatic climate control
system adjusts the fan speed and
airflow levels to maintain the interior
temperature you select.
In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’s
interior temperature is
independently regulated for the
driver and passenger. If the driver’s
side of the vehicle is getting too
much sun, the system will adjust to a
lower temperature.
109
Dual Temperature Control
Without Navigation System:
With Navigation System:With Navigation System
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Automatic Climate Control
Features
107
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３１：３２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１１０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
If you press OFF, the Climate
Control system shuts off completely.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
When the Climate Control System is
turned OFF, the temperature in the
upper display will also turn off.
You can manually select various
functions of the automatic climate
controlsystemwhenitisinAUTO.
All other features remain
automatically controlled.
Press the OFF button. However, a
lack of airflow can cause the
windowstofogup.Youshouldkeep
the fan on at all times so stale air and
moisture do not build up in the
interior and cause fogging.
If you press the A/C button next to
the display, the manual selections
will show in the display. Making any
manual selection causes the
indicator in the AUTO button to turn
off.
Making any manual selection causes
thewordAUTOinthedisplaytogo
out.
With Navigation System
Without Navigation System
With Navigation System
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Manual Operation To Turn Everything Off
108
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３１：４４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１１１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Without Navigation System
With Navigation System
Your vehicle has two temperature
control dials, one for the driver, and
one for the front passenger.
Your vehicle has four temperature
control buttons, two for the driver,
and two for the passenger.
Thedriver’ssideandthepassenger’s
side can be controlled independently
by adjusting these dials or buttons
when the green indicator in the
DUAL button is lit.
Push AUTO or . The selected
temperatures appear in the upper
display. When the indicator in the
DUALbuttonisoff,youcanadjust
both sides to the same temperature
by adjusting the driver’s side
temperature control dial or buttons.
Dual Temperature Control
Temperature Control Dials/Buttons
Features
109
DUAL BUTTON
Without Navigation System
DUAL BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
With Navigation System
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
０５／０１／１１ １１：４１：４９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１１２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
▲▼
To set the driver’s side temperature
to a different value than the
passenger’s, press the DUAL button,
then turn the driver’s control dial or
press the or buttons on the
driver’s side. To set the passenger’s
side to a different value than the
driver’s, turn the passenger’s control
dial or press the or buttons on
the passenger’s side. You can adjust
the passenger’s side without
pressing the DUAL button first.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit or its upper limit, it will be
displayed as or .
Dual Temperature Control
110
DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
０４／１０／３０ １０：０１：１７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１１３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Theclimatecontrolsystemhastwo
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
Sunlight Sensor/Temperature
Sensor
Climate Control Sensors
Features
111
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３２：０７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１１４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the Radio
112
STEREO INDICATOR
SEEK BAR
PRESET BARS
PWR/VOL KNOB
SEEK BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
PWR/VOL
KNOB
UPPER
DISPLAY
PRESET
ICONS
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
TUNE/
SOUND
KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE
BAR
A.SEL
BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
AM/FM
BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
AM/FM
BUTTON
AUDIO
SELECT
ICON
SOUND ICONSCAN
ICON
Without Navigation System With Navigation System (U.S. Model Only)
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３２：１５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１１５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the PWR/VOL knob.
The SCAN function
samples all stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. You will see SCAN in
the display. The system will scan for
a station with a strong signal. When
it finds one, it will stop and play that
station for about five seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
and play it for five seconds. When it
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
SELECT, and the preset bars or
icons.
Use the TUNE bar or
knob to tune the radio to a desired
frequency. Press the side of the
bar or turn the knob to the right to
tune to a higher frequency, and the
side or turn the knob to the left
to tune to a lower frequency.
The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the or side of the
bar, then release it.
Pushing the AUDIO DISPLAY
button will also turn on the system.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available.
XM Satellite Radio information is
available on page .132
With Navigation System
To Play the Radio SCANTo Select a Station
TUNE
SEEK
Playing the Radio
Features
113
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３２：２６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１１６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−Each preset bar or icon
can store one frequency on AM, and
two frequencies on FM.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
baroricon.
Push the AUDIO DISPLAY button
to view the preset icons.
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick the preset number (1 6)
you want for that station. Press
the left or right side of the bar or
iconandholdituntilyouheara
beep.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
1.
2.
3.
4.
With Navigation System
Preset
Playing the Radio
114
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３２：３５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１１７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Press the A. SEL button or touch the
Auto Select icon. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It stores the frequencies of six AM,
and twelve FM stations in the preset
bars (1 6) or icons. You will see a
‘‘0’’ displayed after pressing a preset
bar or icon if Auto Select cannot find
a strong station for every preset bar
or icon.
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset bars
or icons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find stations, then
store them in the preset bars or
icons as described previously.
press the A.
SEL button or Auto Select icon. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
To turn off Auto Select,
AUTO SELECT
Playing the Radio
Features
115
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３２：４０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１１８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the VOLUME knob
or touch the icon to adjust the
setting to your liking. When the level
reaches the center, you will see ‘‘C’’
in the display.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode. On vehicles
with navigation system, touch the
RETURN icon to go back to the
audio screen.
Press the SOUND button or icon, or
press the TUNE knob repeatedly to
display the Bass (BAS), Treble
(TRE), Balance (BAL), and Fader
(FAD) settings. On vehicles with
navigation system, touch the
SOUND icon or press the TUNE
knob.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
Use the TRE/BAS
modes to adjust the tone to your
liking.
If you want to adjust the sound while
the radio/CD is playing, push the
AUDIO DISPLAY button, then touch
the SOUND icon in the display.
Touch the arrows next to the BAS or
TRE icons. The adjustment shows
you the current setting.
Touch the left or right bars on the
sound grid. Balance is equalized
when the vertical lines are centered
on the grid.
Touchthefrontorrearbarsonthe
sound grid. The fader is equalized
when the horizontal lines are
centered on the grid.
With Navigation System
Without Navigation System
With Navigation System
Adjusting the Sound
Balance/Fader
Treble/Bass
Playing the Radio
116
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３２：５１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１１９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least ten
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).
Stations on the FM band are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
Playing the Radio
Features
117
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３３：０１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１２０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Playing the Radio
118
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３３：０９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１２１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD
Features
119
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
CD LOAD
INDICATOR
CD BUTTON
SEEK BAR
PWR/VOL
KNOB
LOAD
BUTTON
CD SLOT
CD LOAD INDICATOR
RANDOM
ICON
EJECT
BUTTON
LOAD BUTTON
RPT BUTTON
RDM
BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
CD SLOT
PWR/VOL KNOB
CD BUTTON
UPPER DISPLAY
CHANGE
DISC
BUTTON
TRACK
RPT
ICON
DISC RPT
ICON
Without Navigation System With Navigation System
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３３：１７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１２２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To load or play CDs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON(II) position.
You operate the CD player/CD
changer with the same controls used
for the radio. To select the CD
player/CD changer, press the CD
button. The number of the track
playing is shown in the display. With
the in-dash CD changer, the disc and
track numbers are displayed. The
system will continuously play a CD
until you change modes.
To listen to satellite radio when a CD
is playing, press the CD/AUX XM
button.
To play the tape when a CD is
playing, insert a tape in the player
(optional). If a tape is in the player,
press the AUX button. Press the CD
button again to switch back to the
CD player. The cassette player is
optional on all U.S. models.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
Insert a CD into the CD slot. The
drive will pull the CD in the rest of
the way to play it. When the system
reaches the end of the disc, it will
return to the beginning and play the
disc again.
To play the radio when a CD is
playing, press the AM/FM button.
Press the CD button again to switch
back to the CD player.
For vehicles with Satellite Radio
To Play a CD
Playing a CD, CD Changer
120
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３３：２５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１２３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
＋
▲
▼
Press the LOAD button until you
hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAd’’ in the
display.
The disc number for an empty
position is highlighted and the red
light starts blinking.
When the CD load indicator turns
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
screen again, insert the next CD in
the slot.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 until all
six positions are loaded. If you are
not loading all six positions, the
system begins playing the last CD
loaded.
You can also load a CD into an empty
position while a CD is playing. Select
the empty position (the disc number
indicator is not highlighted) and
press the appropriate preset bar or
touch a disc icon. The current CD
stops playing and starts the loading
sequence. The CD just loaded will
play.
You operate the CD changer with
the same controls used for the radio.
The numbers of the disc and track
playingareshowninthedisplay.On
vehicles with navigation system,
these numbers also appear in the
upper display.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate side of a preset bar
(1 6) or use the Preset 5 (DISC )
to select the previous disc or Preset
6 (DISC ) to select the next disc in
sequence. On vehicles with
navigation system, touch the
appropriate disc icon or press the
or side of the CH/DISC bar. If
youselectanemptypositioninthe
CD changer, the system will try to
load the CD in the next available slot.
Insert the disc into the CD slot
when the green CD load indicator
comes on. Insert it only about
halfway; the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way. You will see
‘‘BUSY’’ in the display as the CD
load indicator turns red and blinks
as the CD is loaded.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
On vehicles with in-dash CD changerFor Vehicle with in-dash CD Changer
Playing a CD, CD Changer
Features
121
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３３：３５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１２４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−−
−
−
Push the to
play the next track on the disc. Push
the oncetoreplaythetrackin
play, press twice to replay the
previous track.
To remove rapidly within a track,
press and hold the , or the
button.
Press to continuously
replay a track. You will see RPT in
the display. Press the RPT button
again to turn it off.
Press to play the
tracks in random order. You will see
RDM in the display. Press the RDM
button again to return to normal play.
The SCAN function
samples all the tracks on the
selected disc in the order they are
recorded. To activate it, press and
release the SCAN button. You will
see SCAN in the display, and you will
get a 10 second sampling of each
track on the selected CD. Press the
SCAN button again to get out of the
system.
To use the controls, press the
AUDIO DISPLAY button, the control
icons will appear on the screen.
Press the icon or
SCAN button, to get a 10 second
sampling of each track on the
current CD. Press the icon or button
again to turn it off.
Touch to get a 10
second sampling of the first song of
each disc in the CD changer. Touch
the icon again to turn it off.
Touch to
continuously play the same song on
the CD. Press the icon again to stop
the function.
Without Navigation System With Navigation System
SEEK/SKIP
REPEAT
RANDOM
SCAN TRACK SCAN
DISC SCAN
TRACK RPT
Playing a CD, CD Changer
122
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３３：４８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１２５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Touch the icon to
continuously replay the current CD.
Touch again to turn it off.
Touch the icon to
play the current CD in random order.
Touch again to stop.
Selects an icon and
plays the disc.
Press the eject button ( ) to
remove the CD. If you eject the CD,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the CD after 15 seconds and put it in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the CD button.
PresstheAM/FMorXM/CD
buttontoswitchtotheradioor
satellite radio while a CD is playing.
Press the CD button again to play
the CD.
If a tape is in the optional tape player,
press the AUX button to switch to
the tape while a CD is playing. Press
the CD button again to switch back
to the CD player.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, the CD will stay in the
drive. When you turn the system
back on, the CD will begin playing
where it left off.
To remove the disc currently playing,
press the EJECT button. When a
disc is removed from a slot, the
system automatically begins the load
sequence so you can load another
CD in that position. If you do not
remove the disc from the changer
within 15 seconds, the system
returns to the previous mode (AM/
FM or satellite radio). The disc will
reload into the system and will
remainthereinapausemode.
To remove a different disc from the
changer,firstselectitwiththe
appropriate preset bar or icon. When
that CD begins playing, press the
eject button. Continue pressing the
EJECT button to remove all the discs
from the changer.
On models with CD player or changer
DISC RPT
TRACK RDM
CH DISC
To Stop Playing a CD
Removing CDs from the Changer
Playing a CD, CD Changer
Features
123
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３３：５９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１２６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋
Load the desired CDs in the
magazine, and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different disc, use Preset 5 (DISC
), for a previous disc; or Preset 6
(DISC ), to select the next disc in
sequence.
If you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will search
for the next available CD to load and
play.
If there are no CDs in the changer,
the display will flash, and you will
have to select another mode.An optional six or eight disc CD
changer is available for your vehicle
from your dealer.
This disc changer uses the same
controls used for the in-dash CD
player/changer or the radio.
Operating the Optional CD
Changer
Playing a CD, CD Changer
124
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３４：０５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１２７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a CD, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
the vehicle to your dealer.
Error Message Cause Solution
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
or
or
CD Player Error Messages
Features
125
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３４：１５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１２８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Error Message
SolutionCause
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a CD, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
the vehicle to your dealer.
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
Check for an error indication. Insert the CDs
again. If the code does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, consult your dealer.
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
Check for an error indication. Insert the CDs
again. If the code does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, consult your dealer.
Insert CDs.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
No CD in the CD
Changer
High Temperature
CD Changer Error Messages
126
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３４：２３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１２９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When using CD-R discs, use only
high quality CDs labeled for audio
use.
When recording a CD-R, the
recording must be closed for it to
be used by the system.
CD-RW discs will not work in this
unit.
Play only standard round CDs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
driveorcauseotherproblems.
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the CD from the center
to the outside edge.
AnewCDmayberoughonthe
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the re-
cording surface of the CD, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player or the magazine.
Handle your CDs properly to
prevent damage and skipping. See
this page. Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the CD to not play
properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
General Information Protecting CDs
Protecting Your CDs
Features
127
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３４：３４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１３０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a Tape (U.S. Vehicles)
128
PWR/VOL KNOB
UPPER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
SEEK BAR
CD/AUX
BUTTON
SEEK BAR
RPT INDICATOR TAPE DIRECTION
INDICATOR
RPT
BUTTON
CD/SAT RADIO
BUTTON
PWR/VOL
KNOB
RPT INDICATOR
NR ICONRPT ICONPROG ICON
TUNE/
SOUND
KNOB
TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
CH/DISC
BAR
PRESET BARS
Without Navigation System With Navigation System
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３４：４０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１３１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
＊
＊
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Make
sure the open side of the tape is
facing right, then insert the tape
most of the way into the slot. The
system will pull the tape in the rest
of the way, and begin to play it.
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the tape is
playing. The indicates the side
youinsertedupwardinnowplaying.
If you want to play the other side,
press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG)
side of the preset bar or press the
AUDIO DISPLAY button and touch
the PROG icon. When the player
reaches the end of the tape, it will
automatically reverse direction and
play the other side.
Dolby noise reduction turns on
when you insert a tape. The
indicator will light in the
display. If the tape was not recorded
in Dolby, turn it off by pressing the
Preset 4 (NR) side of the preset bar
or touching the NR icon. Dolby
remains off until you press the
preset bar or the icon again.
Dolby noise reduction
manufactured under license from
Dolby laboratories licensing
Corporation. ‘‘Dolby’’ and the
double-D symbol are trademarks
of the Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
To remove the tape, press the
EJECT button on the cassette player.
If you want to turn the player off,
press the PWR/VOL knob or turn
off the ignition. The tape will remain
in the drive.
When you turn the system back on,
the tape player will be in pause mode.
Press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG)
side of the preset bar or touch the
PROG icon on vehicles with
navigation system to resume play.
To switch to the radio or CD player
while a tape is playing, press the
AM/FM, or CD/AUX button or CD/
AUX XM button. To change back to
thetapeplayer,pushtheCD/AUX
button or CD/AUX XM button.
Optional on all U.S. models
To Play a Tape To Stop Playing a Tape
Playing a Tape (U.S. Vehicles)
Features
129
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３４：４８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１３２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
▲
▼
−
−
▲
▼
−
To rewind the tape,
push the Preset 1 (REW) side of the
presetbarortheupperside( )of
theCHDISCbar.YouwillseeREW
in the display. To fast forward the
tape, push the Preset 2 (FF) side of
the preset bar. You will see FF dis-
played.PressthePreset1,2,or3
sideofthebarsorthelowerside
( ) of the CH DISC bar to take the
system out of rewind or fast forward.
Press the side to find
the beginning of the current song or
passage. Press the side to find
the beginning of the next song or
passage. When the system reaches
the beginning of a song or passage, it
begins to play it.
To rewind the tape
push the upper side ( ) of the CH
DISC bar. To fast forward the tape,
push the lower side ( ) of the CH
DISC bar. Press either side of the
PROG icon in the audio display to
take the system out of rewind or fast
forward.
Press the RPT button
or icon to continuously play a song or
passage. You will see RPT displayed.
The track will repeat until you press
the RPT button or icon again.
The SKIP and REPEAT
functions use silent periods on the
tape to find the end of a song or
passage. These features may not
work if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level, or a silent period in the middle
of a selection.
If you see the error message
‘‘ ’’ on the display, press the
tape eject button to remove the tape
from the unit. Make sure the tape is
not damaged. If the tape will not
eject or the error message stays on
after the tape ejects, take your
vehicle to your dealer.
With Navigation System
With Navigation System
Tape Search Functions
FF/REW
SKIP
FF/REW
REPEAT
Playing a Tape (U.S. Vehicles)
130
NOTE:
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３４：５７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１３３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the tape is loose, tighten it by
turning the hub with a pencil or your
finger. If the label is peeling off,
remove it or it could cause the tape
to jam in the player. Never try to
insert a warped or damaged tape in
the player.
Store tapes in their cases to protect
them from dust and moisture. Never
place tapes where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a tape is exposed
to extreme heat or cold, let it reach a
moderate temperature before
inserting it into the player.
Thetapeplayerpicksupdirtand
oxides from the tape. This
contamination builds up over time
and causes the sound quality to
degrade. To prevent this, you should
clean the player after every 30 hours
of use.
If you do not clean the tape player
regularly, it may eventually become
impossible to remove the
contamination with a normal
cleaning kit. Your dealer has a
cleaning kit available.
Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.
Tapes longer than that may break or
jam the drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects
into the tape player.
Caring for the Tape and Player
Playing a Tape (U.S. Vehicles)
Features
131
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３５：０５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１３４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the
United States except Hawaii, Alaska,
and Canada.
XM
is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
Satellite radio is available in U.S.
models only.
Satellite Digital Radio
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
132
DISP
BUTTON
SAT RADIO
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
TUNE
KNOB
TUNE
BAR
SEEK/
SKIP/
BAR
CATEGORY/CHANNEL
MODE INDICATOR
CATEGORY/CHANNEL
MODE INDICATOR
MODE ICON
SCAN ICON
SEEK/
SKIP/
BAR
PWR/VOL
KNOB
SAT RADIO
BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
PRESET
BARS
PRESET
ICONS
Without Navigation System With Navigation System
TM
TM
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３５：１６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１３５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
The ignition must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on:
Turn the TUNE knob to change
channels. Turn the knob right for
higher numbered channels and left
for lower numbered channels.
Press and release this button to
change the display. The display will
change in the following sequence:
channel name, channel number,
category, artist name, and music title.
Push any of the following: PWR/
VOL knob or the CD/AUX XM
button.
Push any of the following: PWR/
VOL knob, the CD/AUX XM, or
AUDIO button.
Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjust
the volume.
When in the satellite radio mode,
you can use any of three methods to
find channels: TUNE, SEEK/SKIP
(CATEGORY), and SCAN.
Press the TUNE bar to change
channel selections. Press for
higher numbered channels and
for lower numbered channels.
With Navigation System
Without Navigation System
With Navigation System With Navigation System
Without Navigation System
To Play XM Satellite Radio TUNEDISP
To Select a Channel
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Features
133
TM
TM
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３５：２８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１３６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
−
The
seek/skip function selects the
various categories in XM, such as
Jazz/Blues, Rock, Classical, etc.
Push the to change the
category forward. Push the to
change the category backward. To
search for channels within a
category, turn the TUNE knob
clockwiseorpresstheTUNEbar
.
The scan function samples
all channels for 5 seconds. To
activate the function, push the SCAN
button. Push it again to get out of the
sequence.
Each preset icon or button
canstoreonechannelinXM1and
one in XM2.
Use the TUNE, SEEK or SCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired channel.
Pick a preset icon or button and
hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on XM1 and XM2.
Once your XM channels are preset,
pressing the CH DISC button will
select your preset channels.
Push the CD/AUX XM button.
(You will see XM1 or XM2.)
1.
2.
3.
4.
With Navigation System
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY) SCAN
Preset
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
134
TM
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３５：３７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１３７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Satellite radio receives signals from
two satellites to produce clear, high-
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, satellite
radio also allows you to view channel
and category selections in the audio
display.
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas. Satellite signals
aremorelikelytobeblockedbytall
buildings and mountains the farther
north you travel from the equator.
Satellite Radio Signals
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Features
135
Signal may be
blocked by
mountains or
large obstacles
to the south.
SATELLITE
GROUND
REPEATER
TM
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３５：４３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１３８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Drivingonaneast/westroadwith
a mountain on the south side of
the road.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect satellite
radio reception.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving in the tunnels.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, push the
PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio
system and press the CD/AUX XM
button. A variety of music types and
styles will play.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
136
TM
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３５：５４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１３９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
While awaiting activation, make sure
your vehicle remains in an open area
with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, ‘‘category’’
or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display
and you will be able to listen to XM
Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will
continue to send an activation signal
to your vehicle for at least 12 hours
from activation request. If the
service has not been activated after
36 hours, contact XM Radio.
If you decide to purchase XM
Satellite Radio service, contact XM
Radio at , or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number.
Turn the TUNE knob until ‘‘0’’
appears in the display. Your I.D. will
appear in the display.
After you have registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
SAT Radio mode while you await
activation. This should take about 30
minutes.
www.xmradio.com
To get your XM Satellite radio ID
number:
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Features
137
TM
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３６：００ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１４０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
＋
−
＋
−
＋
−
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top
or bottom of the button and hold it
until the desired volume is reached,
then release it.
IfyouareplayingaCD,thesystem
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you press the top
( ) of the CH button. Press the
bottom ( ) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it twice to return to the previous
track. You will see the disc and track
numbers in the display.
Ifyouareplayingatapeinthe
optional tape player, press the top
( ) of the CH button to advance to
the next selection. Press the bottom
( ) to go back to the previous
selection. The system senses a silent
period, then resumes playing.
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
XM1, XM2, CD, or a tape.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top ( ) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
( ) to go back to the previous
station.
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
Steering Wheel Controls
138
CH BUTTON
VOL BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３６：０８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１４１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If your vehicle’s battery is discon-
nected or goes dead, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the
frequencydisplaythenexttimeyou
turn on the system. Use the preset
buttons to enter the five-digit code.
Thecodeisontheradiocodecard
included in your Owner’s Manual kit.
When it is entered correctly, the
radio will start playing.
If ‘‘0’’ is the first digit in your code,
press and release the TUNE knob to
store it.
If your vehicle is equipped with a
navigation system, press and release
the TUNE knob; the number ‘‘0’’
appears on the display.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for 1
hour before trying again.
Ifthecodecardislost,adealercan
access your code with the your radio’s
serial number. To access the serial
number, turn the radio on. It must
display ‘‘CODE’’, then turn the radio
off. Push the preset 1, preset 6, and
power buttons at the same time, then
quickly release.
You will have to store your favorite
stations on each side of the preset
bars (1 6) after the system begins
working. Your original settings were
lost when power was disconnected.
If ‘‘0’’ is not the first digit in your
code, turn the TUNE knob left or
right until the first digit is displayed.
Press and release the TUNE knob to
store it. Enter the remaining three
digits the same way.Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific five-digit code using
the preset bars or the TUNE knob.
Because there are hundreds of
number combinations possible from
the five-digit, making the system
work without knowing the exact
code is nearly impossible.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system code number
and serial number. It is best to store
this card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from a dealer. To
do this, you will need the system’s
serial number.
Radio Theft Protection
Features
139
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３６：１７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１４２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, you will
need to set the clock.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. Pressing and holding
the SOUND button, then pressing
theR(Preset6)sideofthebarsets
the clock back to the previous hour.
If the displayed time is after the half
hour, the clock sets the clock
forward to the beginning of the next
hour.
For example:
1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
Refer to the Navigation System
Owner’s Manual to set up the time.
Press and hold the SOUND button
until you hear a beep. The displayed
time begins to blink. Press on the H
(Preset 4) side of the bar until the
numbers advance to the desired time.
Change the minutes by pressing the
M (Preset 5) side of the bar until the
numbers advance to the desired time.
When you are finished, press the
SOUND button again to set the time.
Without Navigation System
With Navigation System
Setting the Clock
140
DIGITAL CLOCK
SOUND BUTTON
PRESET BARS
Without Navigation System shown
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３６：２７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１４３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Once the security system is set,
opening any door (without using the
key or the remote transmitter), the
hood, or the trunk will cause it to
sound. It also sounds if the radio is
removed from the dashboard or the
wiring is cut.
With the system set, you can still
open the trunk with the master key
or the remote transmitter without
triggering the alarm. The alarm will
sound if the trunk lock is forced, or
the trunk is opened with the trunk
release handle.
The security system will not set if
the hood, trunk, or any door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the Door Monitor on the
instrument panel (see page ), to
see if the doors and trunk are fully
closed. Since it is not part of the
monitor display, manually check the
hood.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicleorremovetheradio.This
alarm continues for two minutes,
then the system resets. To reset an
alarming system before the two
minutes have elapsed, unlock either
front door with the key or the
remote transmitter.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and trunk. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors from the outside with the key,
lock tab, door lock switch, or remote
transmitter. The security system
light on the instrument panel starts
blinking immediately to show you
the system is setting itself.
57
Security System
Features
141
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３６：３６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１４４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push in the Cruise Control Master
Buttononthesteeringwheel.The
CRUISE MAIN light on the
instrument panel comes on.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Press and release the DECEL/
SET button on the steering wheel.
The CRUISE CONTROL light on
the instrument panel comes on to
show the system is now activated.
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
1.
2.
3.Using the Cruise Control
Cruise Control
142
CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON
CANCEL
BUTTON
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
DECEL/SET
BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
０４／１０／３０ １０：０３：５７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１４５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Thecruisecontrolmaynotholdthe
set speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down. This will cancel the
cruise control. To resume the set
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel will come back on.
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-
celerate to the desired cruising
speed and press the DECEL/SET
button.
To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the DECEL/SET
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the DECEL/SET
button repeatedly. Each time you
do this, your vehicle will slow
down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake or clutch pedal
lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the car slows to the desired
speed, press the DECEL/SET
button.
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.
Changing the Set Speed
Cruise Control
Features
143
０５／０１／０６ １８：２０：５８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１４６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
PressingtheCruiseControlMaster
Button turns the system off and
erases the previous cruising speed.
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Pushthecruisecontrolmaster
button.
Tap the brake pedal.
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake pedal, the system
will remember the previously set
cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h) and then press and
release the RESUME/accel button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
comes on. The vehicle will accelerate
to the same cruising speed as before.
Cancelling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed
Cruise Control
144
０５／０１／０６ １８：２１：０５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１４７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink stores the code in a
permanent memory. There should
be no need to retrain HomeLink if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected.
If your garage door opener was
manufactured before April 1982, you
may not be able to program
HomeLink Universal Transceiver to
operate it. They do not have a safety
feature that causes the motor to stop
and reverse if an obstacle is detected
during closing, increasing the risk of
injury.
Always refer to the opening
instructions and safety information
that came with your garage door
opener or other equipment you
intend to operate with HomeLink. If
you do not have this information,
contact the manufacturer of the
equipment.
HomeLink
is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls .
If you are training HomeLink to
operate a garage door or gate, you
should unplug the motor for that
device during training. Repeatedly
pressing the remote control button
could burn out the motor.
The HomeLink
Universal
Transceiver built into your vehicle
canbeprogrammedtooperateupto
three remote controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
If Your Vehicle Has HomeLink
Universal Transceiver
Important Safety Precautions
General Information
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
145
TM
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３７：１３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１４８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Press and hold the remote control
button and one of the HomeLink
buttons at the same time.
If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button. To do this,
press and hold the two outside
buttons on the HomeLink
Transceiver for about 20 seconds, or
until the red indicator flashes.
Release the buttons, then go to step
1.
If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to step 1.
Unplug the garage door opener
motor from the house current.
Holdtheendofthegaragedoor
opener remote control 2 to 5
inches from HomeLink. Make
sure you are not blocking your
view of the red indicator in
HomeLink.
2.
3.
1.
Training HomeLink
Before you begin
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
146
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３７：２０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１４９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Canadian Owners:
If the button does not work, repeat
this procedure to train it again. If it
still does not work, you may have a
variable or rolling code garage
door opener. See if you do by
pressing and holding the
HomeLink button you just trained.
If the red indicator blinks for 2
seconds,thenstayson,youhavea
rolling code garage door opener.
Go to ‘‘Training With a Rolling
Code System’’.
Repeat these steps to train the
other two HomeLink buttons to
operate any other remotely-
controlled devices around your
home (lighting, automatic gate,
security system, etc.).
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
The following procedure
synchronizes HomeLink to the
garage door opener so it sends and
receives the correct codes.
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener are needed before
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener.The red indicator in HomeLink
should begin flashing. It will flash
slowly at first, then rapidly.
When the red indicator flashes
rapidly, release both buttons.
HomeLink should have learned
the code from the remote control.
Plug in the garage door opener
motor, then test the HomeLink
button by pushing it.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Training With a Rolling Code
System
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
147
The remote control
you are training f rom may stop
transmitting af ter 2 seconds. This is not
enough f or HomeLink to learn the code.
Release and press the button on the
remote control every 2 seconds until
HomeLink has learned the code.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３７：３０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１５０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure you have properly
completed the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure.
Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on your
garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer.
Press the training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
indicator next to the button comes
on, then release it. The indicator
may blink, or come on and stay on.
You then have approximately 30
seconds to complete the following
steps.
Press and hold the button on
HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
Press and hold the HomeLink
button again for 3 to 4 seconds.
This should turn off the training
indicator on the garage door
opener unit. (Some systems may
require you to press the button up
to three times.)
Press the HomeLink button again.
It should operate the garage door.
6.
2.
4.
5.
1.
3.
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
148
TRAINING BUTTON
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３７：３８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１５１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Toerasethecodesstoredinallthree
buttons, press and hold the two
outside buttons until the red light
begins to flash, then release the
buttons.
Youshoulderaseallthreecodes
before selling the vehicle.
Totrainanalreadyprogrammed
HomeLink button with a new device,
you do not have to erase all the
memory. Train the selected button
over the existing memory code
following the steps under
.
If you have problems with training
the HomeLink Wireless Control
System, or would like information on
home products that can be operated
by HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515.
On the Internet, go to www.
homelink.com.
HomeLink
is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Erasing Codes
Retraining a Button
‘‘Training
HomeLink’’
Customer Assistance
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
149
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３７：４９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１５２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
150
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３７：５２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１５３
Main Menu
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
.............................Break-in Period . 152
.................Fuel Recommendation . 152
.........Service Station Procedures . 153
....................................Refueling . 153
Opening and Closing the
.......................................Hood . 154
...................................Oil Check . 155
.............Engine Coolant Check . 156
...............................Fuel Economy . 157
........Improving Fuel Economy . 157
...Accessories and Modifications . 158
................................Accessories . 158
...........Modifying Your Vehicle . 159
.Additional Safety Precautions . 159
.............................Carrying Cargo . 160
................................Load Limits . 161
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk
.................or on a Roof Rack . 162
Carrying Items in the
.....Passenger Compartment . 162
Before Driving
Before Driving
151
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３７：５６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１５４
Main Menu
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Avoidhardbrakingforthefirst
200 miles (300 km).
Do not tow a trailer.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 86 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
We recommend quality gasoline
containing detergent additives that
help prevent fuel system and engine
deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10 percent ethanol
by volume and up to 15 percent
MTBE by volume. Do not use
gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
.
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation
Quick Start Guide
152
０５／０１／０６ １８：２１：１５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１５５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Put the
attachment on the fuel fill cap into
the slit on the fuel fill door.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
Park with the driver’s side closest
to the gas pump.
To open the fuel fill door, push
down on the lever located to the
left of the driver’s seat.
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapors from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
3.
4.
1.
2.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
CONTINUED
Refueling
Service Station Procedure
Before Driving
153
FUEL FILL CAP
Push
TETHER
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flames
away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３８：１９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１５６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To Open the Hood:
Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least three times.
If you do not properly tighten the
cap, the Malfunction Indicator
Lampmaycomeon(seepage
).
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood near the center.
Slide your hand to the left until
you feel the hood latch handle.
Push this handle up to release it.
Lift up the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,
or if you can open the hood without
lifting the handle, the mechanism
should be cleaned and lubricated.
1.
2.
5.
6.
247
Opening and Closing the Hood
Service Station Procedure
154
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCH
０４／１０／３０ １０：０４：０７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１５７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
Insert it all the way back in its hole.
Wipe the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Remove the dipstick (orange
handle).
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
Lift the hood up most of the way.
The hydraulic supports will lift it up
therestofthewayandholditup.
To close the hood, lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then firmly press down on
the front edge of the hood. Make
sure it is securely latched.
1.
2.
3.
4.
201Adding Oil
Oil Check
Service Station Procedure
Before Driving
155
DIPSTICK
(orange handle)
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３８：４１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１５８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to
on page for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
206
193
Engine Coolant Check
Adding
Engine Coolant
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks
Service Station Procedure
156
MAX
RESERVE TANK
MIN
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３８：４８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１５９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always drive in the highest gear
possible.
Try to maintain a constant speed.
Everytimeyouslowdownand
speed up, your vehicle uses extra
fuel. Use cruise control when
appropriate.
Combine several short trips into
one.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
usemorefuel.Usethefresh-air
ventilation when possible.
Always maintain your vehicle
according to the maintenance
schedule. See
(see page
).
Drive moderately. Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking use more fuel.
The build-up of snow or mud on
your vehicle’s underside adds
weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
mileage and reduces the chance of
corrosion.
an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses more fuel.
193
For example,
Improving Fuel Economy
Owner’s
Maintenance Checks
Fuel Economy
Before Driving
157
０５／０１／１１ １１：４１：５７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１６０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ) or interfere with
proper operation.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags and anti-lock brakes.
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before
you make any modifications or add
anyaccessories,besuretoreadthe
following information.
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty. Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. In these areas,
accessories may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.
252
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
158
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
０５／０１／１１ １１：４２：０５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１６１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
aftermarket components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Some examples are:
Lowering the vehicle with an
aftermarket suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with an
aftermarket suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Aftermarket wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
Modifying Your Vehicle
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
159
０５／０１／０６ １８：２１：２２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１６２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
Roof-rack (if installed)
Console compartment
Center pocket
Trunk
Door pockets
Seat-back pockets
However, carrying too much cargo
or improperly storing it can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
Carrying Cargo
160
GLOVE BOXSEAT-BACK POCKET
TRUNK
DOOR POCKET CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
CENTER POCKET
０５／０１／０６ １８：２１：３０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１６３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−×
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (395 kg). This figure
includes the total weight of all
occupants, cargo, and accessories,
and the tongue load if you are towing
a trailer.
Steps for determining correct load
limit:
Locate the statement, ‘‘the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 850
lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.
[The placard is on the driver’s
doorjamb.]
Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
850 pounds or 395 kilograms.
The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.
For example, if the maximum load
is 850 lbs and there will be five 150
lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 100 lbs.
(850 750 (5 150) = 100 lbs.)
Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity in
step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
yourvehicle(seepage ).
1.
2.
5.
6.
3.
4.
182
Load Limits
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
161
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３９：３９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１６４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the trunk
lid, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of
, follow the instructions
on page .
If you carry any items on a roof
rack,besurethetotalweightof
the rack and the items does not
exceed 165 lbs (75 kg).
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all passengers and
accessories must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label
on the driver’s doorjamb.
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the trunk, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
Do not put any items on top of the
rear shelf. They can block your
view and be thrown around the
vehicle during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals or the seat.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving so that someone in the
passenger seat can avoid injuries
to their knees in a crash or a
sudden stop.
49
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
carbon monoxide
poisoning
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on
a Roof Rack
Carrying Cargo
162
０５／０１／０６ １８：２４：３２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１６５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The air intake for the IMA battery
and electronics is located on top of
the trunk panel. Do not block this air
intake; it may cause the IMA battery
and the power control unit to
overheat, causing the IMA system to
shut down. It will start working again
after it cools.
Do not spill any liquids over the air
intake or put any small foreign
objects in it. This may damage the
IMA battery and the power control
unit.
Air used to cool the IMA battery is
vented into the right side of the
trunk. Do not leave perishable items
near this vent.
Air Intake Air Vent in the Trunk
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
163
AIR INTAKE AIR VENT
０４／１０／０１ ２２：３９：５７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１６６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
164
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４０：００ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１６７
Main Menu
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
manual and automatic transmissions.
It also includes important
information on parking your vehicle,
the braking system, the traction
control system, and facts you need if
you are planning to tow a trailer.
........................Preparing to Drive . 166
.......................Starting the Engine . 167
..............Automatic Transmission . 168
Shift Lever Position
...............................Indicators . 168
.......................................Shifting . 168
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 170
....................Shift Lock Release . 171
...........................................Parking . 175
.............................Braking System . 176
...............Brake System Design . 176
.............Brake Wear Indicators . 176
...........Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 177
Activating the Anti-lock
................................Brakes . 177
........................ABS Indicator . 177
..............Traction Control System . 179
.........................TCS Off Switch . 180
.........TCSActivationIndicator .180
............................TCS Indicator . 180
...........................Towing a Trailer . 182
Driving
Driving
165
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４０：０４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１６８
Main Menu
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Make sure the doors are securely
closed and locked.
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page ).
Check that the hood is fully closed.
Check that the trunk is fully
closed.
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
Check the seat adjustment (see
pages to ).
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
pages and ).
When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see pages to
).
3.
2.
1.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
11.
10.
16
89 90
76
54
69
86 88
Preparing to Drive
166
０５／０１／０６ １８：２４：４２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１６９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in START (III) for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the
engine does not start right away,
pause for at least 10 seconds
before trying again.
If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
downandholdittherewhile
starting to clear flooding. Return
to step 5 if the engine does not
start.
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
78
Starting the Engine
Driving
167
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from thef t. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. See
on page .
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４０：２５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１７０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These indicators between the tacho-
meter and speedometer show which
position the shift lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). If it
flashes while driving (in any shift
position), it indicates a possible
problem in the transmission.
To shift from any position, press the
release button on the side of the
shift lever to move it. You cannot
shift out of Park when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY position (I).
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
Dto2
2to1
1to2
2toD
DtoD
DtoN
DtoD
NtoD
RtoN
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the release button.
Press the release button.
Move the lever.
3
3
3
3
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators
Shifting
168
SHIFT LEVER
RELEASE BUTTON
０５／０１／０６ １８：２４：５０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１７１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−−
−
−
This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
button on the side of the shift lever
to move it.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see on
page .
You must also press the release
button to shift into Park. To avoid
transmission damage, come to a
complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
Press the brake
pedal and press the release button to
shift from Park to Reverse. To shift
from Reverse to Neutral, come to a
completestopandthenshift.
This position is similar
to D, except only the first three
gears are selected instead of all five.
Use D when towing a trailer in hilly
terrain, or to provide engine braking
when going down a steep hill. D can
also keep the transmission from
cycling between third and fourth
gears in stop-and-go driving.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear for the vehicle speed
and acceleration. You may notice the
transmission shifting up at higher
speeds when the engine is cold. This
helps the engine warm up faster.
Use Neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle and apply the parking brake.
Press on the brake pedal when you
are moving the shift lever from
Neutral to another gear.
171
3
3
CONTINUED
Automatic Transmission
Park (P)
Shift Lock Release
Reverse (R) Drive (D )
Drive (D)
Neutral (N)
3
Driving
169
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４０：４３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１７２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
Use Second gear:
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
When driving downhill with a
trailer.
To shift from Second to
First, press the release button on the
side of the shift lever. This position
locks the transmission in first gear.
By upshifting and downshifting
through 1, 2, D , and D, you can
operate this transmission much like
a manual transmission without a
clutch pedal.
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
3
Automatic Transmission
Second (2) First (1) Engine Speed Limiter
170
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４０：５２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１７３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift
Lock Release slot cover next to
theshiftlever.Useasmallflat-
tipped screwdriver or finger nail
file to remove the cover. Carefully
pryofftheedgeofthecover.
Insert the key in the Shift Lock
Release slot.This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Set the parking brake.1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
Driving
171
COVER
０４／１０／３０ １０：０４：２６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１７４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push down on the key while you
pressthereleasebuttononthe
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to Neutral.
Remove the key from the Shift
Lock Release slot, then reinstall
thecover.Makesurethenotchon
the cover is on the left side.
Depress the brake pedal and
restart the engine.
If you need to use the Shift Lock
Release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
5.
6.
Automatic Transmission
172
RELEASE
BUTTON
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
０４／１０／３０ １０：０４：３２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１７５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
The engine restarts when you
release the brake pedal. Even while
you are pressing down on the brake
pedal, the engine restarts if the
conditions below are met.
You move the shift lever from N to
R, or from D3 to 2nd.
Youstepontheacceleratorpedal.
Your vehicle has an auto idle stop
system. After your vehicle comes to
a halt, the engine shuts off
automatically if all the following
conditions are met.
The vehicle speed is over 8 mph
(12km/h)beforethevehicle
comes to a stop.
The engine coolant is nearly up to
normal operating temperature.
TheshiftleverisinD,D3orN.
You are pressing on the brake
pedal.
You are not pressing on the
accelerator pedal.
The IMA battery is charged
enough to operate the system.
Fan speed lower fan speeds, in
either AUTO or manual modes.
During Auto Idle Stop, the IMA
charge and power brake vacuum
reserve is monitored by the system.
If the vacuum reserve drops below
an optimal level, the engine will
restart to replenish the vacuum
supply. If the IMA charge drops
below an optimal level, the engine
will restart to recharge the IMA
battery.
The auto idle stop system may not
work if the temperature of the IMA
battery is extremely high or
extremely low.
While the auto idle stop system is
working, the auto idle stop indicator
blinks (see page ).
Outside temperature is between
10 100 degrees F.
The front window defroster is off.
174
Automatic Transmission
Auto Idle Stop
Driving
173
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４１：１９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１７６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator blinks after the auto
idle stop system stops the engine.
While the indicator is blinking, you
can restart the engine with the
ignition switch when the shift lever
is in N, not D.
A beeper sounds if you open the
driver’s door when the auto idle stop
system is activated. After you open
the door during the auto idle stop
and the engine starts, the beeper
also sounds even when the auto idle
stop system is off. Close the door to
turn the beeper off.
Automatic Transmission
Auto Idle Stop Indicator
174
AUTO IDLE STOP INDICATOR
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４１：２４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１７７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission.
Make sure the windows are closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the trunk or take them with you.
Lockthedoorswiththekeyorthe
remote transmitter.
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. They may catch fire
because of the extreme heat of the
three-way catalytic converter.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Parking Tips
Parking
Driving
175
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４１：３４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１７８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious in your driving.
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes. A power assist helps reduce
the effort needed on the brake pedal.
The ABS helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.
Put your foot on the brake pedal only
when you intend to brake. Resting
your foot on the pedal keeps the
brakes applied lightly, builds up heat,
increases wear and reduces their
effectiveness. It also keeps your
brake lights on all the time,
confusing drivers behind you.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
Braking System
Brake Wear Indicators
Braking System Design
176
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４１：４３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１７９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the brakes from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The ABS also balances the front-to-
rear braking distribution according
to vehicle loading.
this defeats the purpose of the ABS.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal as you steer away from
the hazard. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
If the ABS indicator comes on, the
anti-lock function of the braking
system has shut down. The brakes
still work like a conventional system,
but without anti-lock. You should
have your dealer inspect your vehicle
as soon as possible.
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the front-to-rear braking
distribution system may also be shut
down.
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumpingthebrakes.Ondry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforethe
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
You should never pump the brake pedal;
CONTINUED
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Activating the Anti-lock Brakes ABS Indicator
Driving
177
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４１：５３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１８０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock. Slow down and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
those conditions.
The TCS indicator will come on
alongwiththeABSindicator.
261
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
Important Safety Reminders
178
ABS INDICATOR
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４２：０２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１８１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When starting out or driving on a
loose or slippery road surface, you
may notice that the vehicle does not
respond to the accelerator in the
samewayitdoesatothertimes.This
is a sign TCS is activating. You will
seetheTCSActivationindicator
light flash.
TheTCSindicator(seepage )
andtheTCSactivationindicator
comeonandstayonwhenthereisa
problem with the TCS.
You should still install winter tires on
your vehicle during the winter. Make
sure to use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Exercise
the same caution in winter driving as
you would if your vehicle was not
equipped with TCS.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
traction control system (TCS) to
assist you in maintaining traction
while driving slowly on loose or
slippery surfaces.
TCS monitors the speed of all four
wheels. When it senses a front wheel
losing traction, it applies braking to
that wheel. The TCS Activation
indicator flashes when this occurs.
Driving with TCS requires no special
skills or technique. The TCS does
not control your vehicle’s whole
braking system and cannot prevent
skidding if you enter a corner too
fast. It is still your responsibility to
drive at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
Driving with the compact spare tire
installed (see page ) may
activate the TCS. You should turn off
the system.
56
236
On Canadian model
Traction Control System
Driving
179
TCS ACTIVATION INDICATOR
TCS INDICATOR
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４２：１１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１８２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push the TCS Off switch to turn the
TCS off. Push the switch again to
turn the TCS on. The TCS does not
turn off while the TCS activation
indicator is blinking.
TheTCSturnsoneachtimeyou
start the engine.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON(II) position, this indicator
comes on for a few seconds and then
goes off.
This indicator stays on;
When the TCS is off.
When there is something wrong
with the TCS.
This indicator blinks while the TCS
is working to prevent wheelspin.
If this indicator comes on while you
are driving, stop your vehicle in a
safe place, turn the engine off and
restart it. If the indicator stays on, or
comes on again while you are driving,
contact your dealer to have the
vehicle serviced. The TCS does not
work when the indicator is on. The
vehicle is drivable even when the
indicator is on.
Occasionally, the indicator comes on
momentarily even when there is
nothing wrong with the TCS.
Traction Control System
TCS Off Switch TCS Activation Indicator TCS Indicator
180
TCS OFF SWITCH
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４２：２２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１８３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The TCS indicator and the ABS
indicator are on when there is
something wrong with the anti-lock
brake system (see
on page ).
The TCS indicator and the brake
system indicator are on when there
is something wrong with the brake
system (see
on page ).
177
54
Traction Control System
ABS Indicator
Brake System
Indicator
Driving
181
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４２：２６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１８４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has been designed to
primarily carry passengers and their
cargo. You can also use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
The
maximum allowable weight of the
trailerandeverthinginoronit
must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).
Towing a load that is too heavy
can seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
The weight that
the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
puts on the hitch should be
approximately 10 percent of the
total trailer weight. Too much
tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control. Too
little tongue load can make the
trailer unstable and cause it to
sway.
Towing a Trailer
Load Limits
Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:
182
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４２：３３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１８５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60 percent of the
load toward the front of the trailer
and 40 percent toward the rear, then
re-adjust the load as needed.
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo,
and the tongue is:
The best way to confirm that vehicle
and trailer weights are within limits
is to have them checked at a public
scale.
Using a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge, check the tongue
load the first time you set up a
towing combination (a fully-loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle axles is:
on the front axle
on the rear axle
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
Checking LoadsGross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
Towing a Trailer
Driving
183
4,453 lbs (2,020 kg)
2,390 Ibs (1,085 kg)
2,095 Ibs (950 kg)
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４２：４０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１８６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size of
your trailer, how it will be used, how
much load you are towing, and
where you tow.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in the rest of this section.
Also make sure that all equipment is
properly installed and that it meets
federal, state, province, and local
regulations.
Honda recommends that any trailer
having a total weight of 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) or more be equipped with
its own electric or surge-type brakes.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electrically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
Seeyourtrailerdealerformore
information on installing electric
brakes.
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Trailer BrakesHitches
Safety Chains
184
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４２：４９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１８７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, and local
regulations. Check with your local
recreational vehicle dealer for the
requirements in your area, and use
only equipment designed for your
vehicle.
Many states and Canadian provinces
require special outside mirrors when
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
you should install special mirrors if
you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Askyourtrailersalesorrental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
Since lighting and wiring vary by
trailer type and brand, you should
have a qualified technician install a
suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.
Trailer Lights Additional Towing Equipment
Towing a Trailer
Driving
185
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４２：５７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１８８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, cooling system, and
lights are in good operating
condition.
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated (see page ),
and the trailer tires and spare are
trailer maker.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
All items in or on the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
All weights and loads are within
limits (see pages and ).
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
below.
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
If you have an automatic
transmission, use D position when
towing a trailer on level roads. D is
the proper shift lever position to use
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain.
(See ‘‘ ’’ in the next
column for additional gear
information.)
182 183
220
3
Pre-Tow Checklist
Driving Safely With a Trailer
Towing a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears
Driving on Hills
186
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４３：０８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１８９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maketurnsmoreslowlyandwider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
canhitorrunoversomethingthe
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently while going up a hill, shift
to D .
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
placebypressingontheaccelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed, and shift down to 2nd
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember, it will take longer to slow
downandstopwhentowingatrailer.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause trailer
swaying. When being passed by a
large vehicle, keep a constant speed,
and steer straight ahead. Do not try
to make quick steering or braking
corrections.
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
andturnthewheelrighttomovethe
trailer to the right.
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
3
bottom
Towing a Trailer
Making Turns and Braking
Driving on Hills
Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
Backing Up
Parking
Driving
187
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４３：１９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１９０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
188
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４３：２２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１９１
Main Menu
This section also includes
Maintenance Schedules for normal
driving and severe driving conditions,
a Maintenance Record, and instruc-
tions for simple maintenance tasks
you may want to take care of
yourself.
If you have the skills and tools to per-
form more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the Service Manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
......................Maintenance Safety . 190
.................Maintenance Schedule . 191
............Servicing Your Vehicle . 192
Owner’s Maintenance
...................................Checks . 193
...................Normal Conditions . 194
.....................Severe Conditions . 195
....................Maintenance Record . 196
..............................Fluid Locations . 200
........................Adding Engine Oil . 201
.......Recommended Engine Oil . 201
..............................Synthetic Oil . 202
................Engine Oil Additives . 202
.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 203
....................Windshield Washers . 205
..............................Engine Coolant . 206
.......................Transmission Fluid . 208
....................................Brake Fluid . 209
....................................Timing Belt . 209
.............................................Lights . 210
.......................................Seat Belts . 216
........................Driver’s Floor Mat . 216
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 216
.................................Wiper Blades . 217
...............................................Tires . 219
..................Inflation Guidelines . 219
.Recommended Tire Pressure . 220
..........................Tire Inspection . 221
.....................Tire Maintenance . 221
.............................Tire Rotation . 222
...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 222
......................Wheels and Tires . 223
..........................Winter Driving . 223
.............................Snow Tires . 223
............................Tire Chains . 224
...................Checking the Battery . 225
.............................Vehicle Storage . 226
275
Maintenance
Maintenance
189
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４３：２９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１９２
Main Menu
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when
working near the battery or
when using compressed air.
Be sure
there is adequate ventilation
whenever you operate the
engine.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
before touching any parts.
Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Carbon Monoxide poison
from engine exhaust.
Burns from hot parts.
Injury f rom moving parts.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
190
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection,
maintenance recommendations,
and schedules in this owner’s
manual.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４３：４１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１９３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Follow the
Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Conditions if you drive your vehicle
MAINLY under one or more of the
following conditions.
Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)
per trip or, in freezing
temperatures, driving less than 10
miles (16 km) per trip.
Driving in extremely hot [over
90°F (32°C)] conditions.
Used primarily as a delivery
vehicle or taxi that is driven
mostly in stop-and-go traffic and/
or parked with the engine idling.
Trailer towing, driving with a
loaded roof top carrier, or driving
in mountainous conditions.
Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-
iced roads.
The maintenance schedule assumes
you will use your vehicle as normal
transportation for passengers and
their possessions. You should also
follow these recommendations:
Service your vehicle according to the
time and mileage periods on one of
the Maintenance Schedules on the
following pages.
Avoid exceeding your vehicle’s
load limit. This puts excess stress
on the engine, brakes, and many
other vehicle parts. The load limit
is shown on the tire information
label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Operate your vehicle on
reasonable roads within the legal
speed limit.
Drive your vehicle regularly over a
distance of several miles
(kilometers).
Always use unleaded gasoline with
theproperoctanerating(seepage
).
Follow the
Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Conditions.
152
Maintenance Schedule
Which Schedule to Follow
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
Maintenance
191
If you only OCCASIONALLY drive
under a ‘‘severe’’ condition, you
should f ollow the Normal Conditions
Maintenance Schedule.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４３：５３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１９４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＃
Your authorized dealer knows your
vehicle best and can provide
competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
skilled person to keep your
warranties in effect. Keep all the
receipts as proof of completion, and
have the person who does the work
fill out the Maintenance Record.
Check your warranty booklet for
more information.
We recommend the use of Honda
parts and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done.
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed at the recommended time
or mileage period to ensure long-
term reliability.
U.S. Vehicles:
Maintenance Schedule
Servicing Your Vehicle
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
192
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４３：５９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１９５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See pages
.
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
155
156
208 209
209
219
Maintenance Schedule
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
Maintenance
193
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４４：０８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１９６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＃
＊
＊
＃
＃
＊
＊
194
Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).
miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
15
24
30
48
45
72
60
96
75
120
90
144
105
168
120
192
135
216
150
240
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Check inflation and condition once a month
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or every 2 years, whichever comes first
Inspect every 105,000 miles (168,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Inspect every 165,000 miles (264,000 km)
Every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or every 7 years, whichever comes first
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .
Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.
U.S. only
Check engine oil and coolant
Check tires
Replace engine oil
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 222 )
Replace engine oil filter
Check front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect the following items:
Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Check expiration date for IMS bottle
Inspect drive belts
Replace dust and pollen filter
Replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace automatic transmission fluid
Inspect idle speed
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
Replace engine coolant
Replace brake fluid
:
1:
2:
192
1
2
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４４：２８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１９７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＃
＊
＊
＊
＊
＃
＃
＊
＊
＊
＃＊
195
See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.
Replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years.
See timing belt on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.
Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).
miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
15
24
30
48
45
72
75
120
135
216
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Check inflation and condition once a month
Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or every 2 years, whichever comes first
Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions)
Inspect every 105,000 miles (168,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Inspect every 165,000 miles (264,000 km)
Every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or every 7 years, whichever comes first
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
60
96
90
144
105
168
120
192
150
240
Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .
U.S. only
Check engine oil and coolant
Check tires
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 222 )
Check front and rear brakes
Inspect the following items:
Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Check parking brake adjustment
Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches
Inspect the following items:
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Lights and controls/vehicle underbody
Check expiration date for IMS bottle
Inspect drive belt
Replace dust and pollen filter
Replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace automatic transmission fluid
Inspect idle speed
Replace timing belt , and inspect water pump
Replace engine coolant
Replace brake fluid
:
1:
2:
3:
4:
192
216
209
1
2
3
4
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４４：５１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１９８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
(for Normal and Severe Schedules)
Maintenance Record
196
3,750 mi
5,000 mi
7,500 mi
10,000 mi
11,250 mi
15,000 mi
18,750 mi
20,000 mi
22,250 mi
25,000 mi
26,250 mi
30,000 mi
33,750 mi
35,000 mi
37,500 mi
40,000 mi
6,000 km
8,000 km
12,000 km
16,000 km
18,000 km
24,000 km
30,000 km
32,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
36,000 km
40,000 km
42,000 km
48,000 km
54,000 km
56,000 km
60,000 km
64,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severe
conditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.
194
195
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４４：５９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０１９９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
(for Normal and Severe Schedules)
CONTINUED
Maintenance Record
Maintenance
197
41,250 mi
45,000 mi
48,750 mi
50,000 mi
52,500 mi
55,000 mi
56,250 mi
60,000 mi
63,750 mi
65,000 mi
67,500 mi
70,000 mi
71,250 mi
75,000 mi
78,750 mi
80,000 mi
66,000 km
72,000 km
78,000 km
80,000 km
84,000 km
88,000 km
90,000 km
96,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
102,000 km
104,000 km
108,000 km
112,000 km
114,000 km
120,000 km
126,000 km
128,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４５：０８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２００
Main Menu
Table of Contents
(for Normal and Severe Schedules)
Maintenance Record
198
82,500 mi
85,000 mi
86,250 mi
90,000 mi
93,750 mi
95,000 mi
97,500 mi
100,000 mi
101,250 mi
105,000 mi
108,750 mi
110,000 mi
112,500 mi
115,000 mi
116,250 mi
120,000 mi
132,000 km
136,000 km
138,000 km
144,000 km
150,000 km
152,000 km
156,000 km
166,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
162,000 km
168,000 km
174,000 km
176,000 km
180,000 km
184,000 km
186,000 km
192,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４５：１４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２０１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
(for Normal and Severe Schedules)
Maintenance Record
Maintenance
199
123,750 mi
125,000 mi
127,500 mi
130,000 mi
131,250 mi
135,000 mi
138,750 mi
140,000 mi
142,500 mi
145,000 mi
146,250 mi
150,000 mi
198,000 km
200,000 km
204,000 km
208,000 km
210,000 km
216,000 km
222,000 km
224,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
228,000 km
232,000 km
234,000 km
240,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４５：２１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２０２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fluid Locations
200
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
０５／０１／０６ １８：２４：５４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２０３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Install the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level.
Do not fill above the upper mark; you
could damage the engine.
Recommended Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
Maintenance
201
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４５：３２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２０４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your Honda to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect your engine’s or transmission’s
performance and durability.
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil, it
displays the API Certification Seal
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals given in the maintenance
schedule.
Synthetic Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Adding Engine Oil
202
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Ambient Temperature
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４５：４０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２０５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the hood and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Always change the oil and filter
according to the recommendations in
the maintenance schedule. The oil
and filter collect contaminants that
can damage your engine if they are
not removed regularly.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
Remove the oil filter and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
3.
2.
1.
Changing the Oil and Filter
Maintenance
203
WASHEROIL DRAIN BOLT
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４５：４８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２０６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten it to:
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the connecting
surface of a new oil filter.
Refill the engine with the recom-
mended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level on the dipstick. If necessary,
add more oil.
9.
8.
7.
6.
4.
5.
Changing the Oil and Filter
204
OIL FILTER
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４５：５９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２０７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the level in the windshield
washer reservoir at least monthly
during normal use.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
Check the reservoir’s fluid level by
removing the cap and looking at the
level gauge attached to the cap.
The low washer level
indicator will come on when the level
is low (see page ).59
Canadian model:
Windshield Washers
Maintenance
205
LEVEL GAUGE
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４６：０７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２０８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporaryreplacement.Makesureit
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Adding Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
206
RESERVE TANK
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４６：１５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２０９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pourthecoolantslowlyand
carefully so you do not spill. Clean
up any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Put the radiator cap back on and
tighten it.
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
4.
1.
2.
3.
5.
6.
Engine Coolant
Maintenance
207
RADIATOR CAP
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４６：２５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２１０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the level is below the lower
mark, remove the fill plug and add
fluid into the tube to bring it to the
upper mark.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spills immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If
it’s not available, you may use a
DEXRON
III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality. Have
the transmission flushed and refilled
with Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it is
convenient.
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Shut off the engine.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission.
Make sure the rubber cap fits in
the dipstick guide and the dipstick
is down all the way.
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
5.
3.
4.
1.
2.
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission
208
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK
０４／１０／３０ １０：０４：４４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２１１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
To thoroughly flush the transmission,
the technician should drain and refill
it with Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid), then drive the
vehicle for a short distance. Do this
three times. Then drain and refill the
transmission a final time.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
The timing belt should be replaced
at the intervals shown in the
maintenance schedule. Replace the
belt at 60,000 miles (100,000 km) if
you regularly drive your vehicle in
one or more of these conditions:
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under 20°F, 29°C).
Frequently tow a trailer.
6.
Transmission Fluid, Brake Fluid, Timing Belt
Timing BeltBrake Fluid
Maintenance
209
MAX
MIN
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４６：４６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２１２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment
may be required. Adjustments
should be performed by your dealer
or other qualified mechanic.
Your vehicle has two bulbs on each
side, four in total. Make sure you are
replacing the bulb that is burned out.
Your vehicle uses halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Lights
210
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
０５／０１／０６ １８：２４：５９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２１３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
Install the new bulb and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
Push the electrical connector onto
the bulb.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Open the hood. To change a bulb
on the driver’s side, undo the two
fasteners and remove the air
intake cover.
Reinstall the air intake cover.
Reinstall the two fasteners and
secure them by pushing on the
heads until they lock.
1. 3.
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
High Beam Headlight
Lights
Maintenance
211
AIR INTAKE
COVER
FASTENERS
TAB
BULB
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４７：０５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２１４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To change the passenger’s side
bulb, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
left, and turn off the engine. To
change the driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right.
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.
Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender and bumper.
Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
Install the new bulb and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
Push the electrical connector onto
the bulb.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install the two holding clips. Lock
each one in place by pushing on
the center.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Low Beam Headlight
Lights
212
HOLDING CLIPS
BULB
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４７：１７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２１５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To change the passenger’s side
bulb, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
left, and turn off the engine. To
change the driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right.
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.
To remove the burned out bulb,
push it in and turn it
counterclockwise until it unlocks.
Install the new bulb and turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Insert the socket into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Test the new bulb to make sure it
works.
Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install and lock each holding clip
bypushingonthecenter.
Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender and bumper.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
1.
3.
2.
4.
8.
7.
6.
9.
5.Replacing the Front Side Marker/
Turn Signal and Parking Light
Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
213
HOLDING CLIPS
BULB
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４７：３０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２１６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the trunk.
Remove the light assembly cover
by pulling its outside edge.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise,
and pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push a new bulb straight into the
socket until it bottoms, and
reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
Testthenewbulbtomakesureit
works.
Reinstall the light assembly cover.
Open the trunk.
Remove the trim clips from the
right or left corner of the trunk lid
trim by carefully prying them
using a small, flat-tip screwdriver
wrapped with tape.
3.
2.
1.
4.
5.
6.
2.
1.
Replacing Rear Bulbs
(in Fenders)
Replacing Rear Bulbs
(in Trunk Lid)
Lights
214
BULBS
SOCKETS
COVER TRIM CLIP
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４７：４２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２１７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the trunk and remove the
socket from the light assembly by
turning it one-quarter turn counter-
clockwise.
Remove the burned-out bulb by
pulling it straight out of the socket.
Install the new bulb and reinstall
the socket.
Carefully bend back the corner of
the trunk lid trim to expose the
bulbs.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise,
and pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Install a new bulb into the socket,
and reinstall the socket into the
light assembly.
Test the lights.
Push the trunk lid trim back into
position.
Press the trim clips back into their
holes.
1.
3.
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
215
BULBS
SOCKETS
BULBS
SOCKETS
SOCKET
BULB
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４７：５６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２１８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Clean dirty seat belts with a soft
brush and a mixture of mild soap and
warm water. Do not use bleach, dye,
or cleaning solvents that can weaken
the belt material. Let the belts air
drybeforeyouusethevehicle.
To prevent the driver’s floor mat
from moving around, make sure it is
anchored using the floor mat hooks.
If you need to use any other type of
floor mat, make sure it can be
properly anchored. Do not put
additional mats over the anchored
mat.
This filter removes the dust and
pollenthatisbroughtinfromthe
outside through the heating and
cooling system/climate control
system.
Have your dealer replace this filter
every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
under normal conditions. It should
be replaced every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km) if you drive primarily in
urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air, or if
the flow from the climate control
system becomes less than usual.
Seat Belts Driver’s Floor Mat Dust and Pollen Filter
Seat Belts, Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter
216
LOOP
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４８：０５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２１９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Look for signs of cracking in the
rubber, or areas that are getting
hard. Replace the blades if you find
these signs, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
To replace a wiper blade:
Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield. Raise the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
Disconnect the blade assembly
fromthewiperarmbypushingin
the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
while you push the blade assembly
toward the base of the arm.
2.
1.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
217
WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４８：１３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２２０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield. Lower the
passenger’s side first, then the
driver’s side.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
Wiper Blades
218
BLADE BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４８：２２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２２１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicleridemoreharshly,are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced. Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km). Add or release air, if
needed, to match the recommended
cold tire pressures on the next page.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
sparetireatthesametime.
Inflation Guidelines
Tires
Maintenance
219
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４８：３１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２２２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot (driven for several
miles), you will see readings 4 to 6
psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm )
higher than the cold readings. This
is normal. Do not let air out to match
the recommended cold air pressure.
The tire will be underinflated.
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge whenever you check
your tire pressures. This will make it
easier for you to tell if a pressure
loss is due to a tire problem and not
due to a variation between gauges.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
Keep the inflation pressure of your
normal tires at 32 psi (220 kPa,
2.2 kgf/cm ).
Keep the inflation pressure of your
compact spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa,
4.2 kgf/cm ).
See page or refer to the tire
placard on the driver’s doorjamb for
correct tire pressure.
261
On Canadian model
Recommended Tire Pressure
Tires
220
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４８：４０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２２３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide across
the tread. This shows there is less
than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left
on the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
Excessive tread wear.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Tire Inspection Tire Maintenance
Tires
Maintenance
221
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only genuine Honda wheels weights f or
balancing.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４８：５１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２２４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS to work inconsistently.
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
Move the tires to the positions
shown in the illustration each time
they are rotated. If you purchase
directional tires, rotate only front-to-
back.
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000
km).
Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels
Tires
222
(For Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
Front Front
(For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４８：５９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２２５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
maybelowerthanyouroriginaltires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
weather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
Wheel:
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer. Tire:
See page for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
for tire size information.
262
264
Snow Tires
Winter DrivingWheels and Tires
Tires
Maintenance
223
16x61/2JJ
P215/60R16 94V
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４９：１０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２２６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
youbegindrivingonclearedroads.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Honda strongly
recommends using the chains listed
below, made by Security Chain
Company (SCC).
Mount snow chains on your tires
when required by driving conditions
or local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
Cable-types: SCC Radial Chain
CH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030
Tire Chains
Tires
224
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４９：１７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２２７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−Check the condition of the battery
monthlybylookingatthetest
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative ( ) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
WARNING:
Wash your hands after handling.
Checking the Battery
Maintenance
225
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４９：２４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２２８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than one
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Fill the fuel tank.
Change the engine oil and filter.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Vehicle Storage
Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage
226
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４９：３０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２２９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
vehiclebodywaxtothepainted
surfaces that mate with the door
and trunk seals.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
If you store your vehicle for 1 year or
longer, have your dealer perform the
inspections called for in the 2 years/
30,000 miles (48,000 km)
maintenance schedule (Normal
Conditions) as soon as you take it
out of storage (see page ). The
replacements called for in the
maintenance schedule are not
needed unless the vehicle has
actually reached that time or mileage.
Reconnect the 12 volt battery and
drive your vehicle every month for
about 30 minutes. This will keep
the IMA battery charged and in
good condition.
Disconnect the 12 volt battery.
194
Vehicle Storage
Maintenance
227
０５／０４／１１ １５：５３：１６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２３０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
228
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４９：４３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２３１
Main Menu
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
.............................Flat Tire Repair . 230
......................Compact Spare Tire . 236
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 237
.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 240
Nothing Happens or the
Starter Motor Operates
............................Very Slowly . 240
The Starter Operates
................................Normally . 241
................................Jump Starting . 242
..............If the Engine Overheats . 244
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 246
..........Charging System Indicator . 247
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 247
.......................Readiness Codes . 248
...............Brake System Indicator . 249
......................Emergency Towing . 250
..............................................Fuses . 252
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
229
０４／１０／０１ ２２：４９：４７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２３２
Main Menu
Your vehicle is not equipped with a
spare tire. Instead, it has a flat tire
repair kit that can allow you to
temporarily repair a flat caused by a
nail or other small item.
Thetirerepairkitmaynotworkif;
The puncture is located outside
the tread,
The puncture is wider than about
3/16ths of an inch (4 mm),
The wheel rim is damaged,
The tire sealant has expired.
Use of the sealant in the repair kit
may void your tire warranty.
Check with the tire manufacturer
if you have any questions
regarding the tire warranty.
Make sure you have parked safely
off the road, turned the ignition
switch to OFF, and set the parking
brake. Then, lift up the trunk floor
to access the repair kit.
Remove the sealant bottle, and
check the label to be sure the
sealant has not expired.
1.
2.
Flat Tire Repair (U.S. Model)
HowtoUsetheTireRepairKit
230
EXPIRATION DATE
０４／１０／３０ １０：１５：２１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２３３
Table of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
If the sealant has not expired,
remove the sealant filler tube, the
pliers, the air pump, the
instruction sheet, and the small
plastic bag stored under the
sealant bottle, and place these
items conveniently near the flat
tire.
If possible, use the pliers to
remove the nail or other
embedded object.
Unscrew the tire valve cap.
Remove the valve core tool from
the plastic bag, insert the knob
end of the tool into the valve, and
push until the tire is completely
deflated.
5.4.3.
Flat Tire Repair (U.S. Model)
Taking Care of the Unexpected
231
SEALANT FILLER TUBE
AIR PUMP
VALVE CORE TOOL
SEALANT
BOTTLE
PLIERS
NAIL or OTHER
OBJECT
VALVE CAP
TIRE VALVE
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５０：０７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２３４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Removetheplugfromtheendof
the filler tube, slip the tube onto
the tire valve, then squeeze all the
sealant into the tire.
Shake the sealant bottle, then
screw the sealant filler tube onto
the bottle (this will break the
aluminum seal).
Insert the notched end of the valve
core tool into the valve, turn
counterclockwise, and remove the
valve core.
Be careful handling the bottle as
spilled sealant can permanently
damage clothing.
6. 7. 8.
Flat Tire Repair (U.S. Model)
232
TIRE VALVE
VALVE CORE TOOL
VALVE CORE
removed
SEALANT FILLER TUBE
SEALANT BOTTLE
TIRE VALVE
FILLER TUBE
SEALANT BOTTLE
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５０：１６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２３５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Replace the valve core inside the
tire valve. (A spare core is
provided in the plastic bag in case
the original core becomes lost or
damaged.)
Insert the notched end of the valve
core tool into the valve, then turn
clockwise to reseat the core. Be
careful not to overtighten the core.
Screw the air pump hose onto the
tire valve.
Route the power cord into the
vehicle, through an open window
for example. Lift the lid to access
the accessory power socket, and
insert the power plug into the
socket.
Turn the ignition switch to
ACCESSORY (I).
Remove the labels from the plastic
bag. Attach the wheel label onto
the center of the wheel (it has
important information for the
technician making a permanent
repair). Attach the instrument
panel label onto the instrument
panel.
9.
10.
11. 12.
13.
14.
Flat Tire Repair (U.S. Model)
Taking Care of the Unexpected
233
VALVE CORE TOOL
TIRE VALVE
WHEEL LABEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL LABEL
VALVE CORE to be reinstalled
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
POWER CORDAIR PUMP HOSE
０４／１０／３０ １０：１５：３３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２３６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn the air pump switch on, and
fillthetireto32psi.(Turnthe
switch off for an accurate reading.)
Do not run the pump for more
than 15 minutes or the pump will
overheat.
Ifthetiredoesnotinflateto32psi,
stop the procedures, and call or
wait for help.
Ifthetireproperlyinflatesto32
psi, replace the valve cap and store
all repair kit items. Keep the air
pump handy, as you will need to
use it again.
Immediately drive for 10 minutes,
being sure not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h). This is necessary to
distribute the sealant inside the
tire and give it a chance to work.
15.
16. 17.
Flat Tire Repair (U.S. Model)
234
AIR PUMP SWITCH
PRESSURE GAUGE
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５０：３４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２３７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Safely stop to check if the sealant
is working. Remove the tire valve
cap, screw the air pump hose onto
the tire valve, and check the air
gauge. (You do not need to attach
the power cord or turn the air
pump switch on.)
If the air pressure is less than 19 psi,
do not continue procedures. The
repair did not work. Call or wait for
help.
If the pressure is 32 psi, continue
driving at no more than 50 mph
(80 km/h) to the nearest service
station for assistance.
If the pressure is between 19 and 32
psi, add air to 32 psi as described in
Steps 12 14, then drive to nearest
service station.
Be sure to have the damaged tire
permanently repaired or replaced as
soon as possible.
18.
Flat Tire Repair (U.S. Model)
Taking Care of the Unexpected
235
PRESSURE GAUGE
AIR PUMP
AIR PUMP
HOSE
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５０：４１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２３８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road sur-
faces. Use greater caution while
driving.
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.
Do not use the compact spare tire
if you are towing a trailer.
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
thesamemakeandmodel.
Turn off the TCS (see page ).
Driving with the compact spare
tire installed may activate the TCS.
180
Compact Spare Tire (Canadian Model)
236
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
０５／０２／１０ １６：３０：４１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２３９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area that is
far away from the traffic lanes.
Loosen the wheel nuts 1/2 of a
turn with the wheel wrench.
Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
Take the tool tray out of the trunk,
and take the tools out of the tool
tray.
Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake.
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0). Keep your passengers
out of the vehicle while changing a
tire.
Open the trunk and raise the trunk
floor by lifting up on the back edge.
5.
4.
3.
2.
1.
6.
Changing a Flat Tire (Canadian Model)
Taking Care of the Unexpected
237
TOOL TRAY
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５１：０５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２４０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully;itmaybehotfrom
driving.Remove the wheel nuts and flat
tire. Place the flat tire on the
ground with the outside surface of
the wheel facing up.
Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
restinginthejacknotch.
10.8.
9.
7.
Changing a Flat Tire (Canadian Model)
238
EXTENSION
BRAKE HUB
WHEEL WRENCH
JACKING POINT
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５１：１２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２４１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
Lower the vehicle to the ground
and remove the jack.
Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire in the trunk
well.
Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
Securetheflattirebyscrewing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
place. Replace the cover. Store the
tools.
11.
12.
13.
15.
16.
17.
18.
14.
CONTINUED
Changing a Flat Tire (Canadian Model)
Taking Care of the Unexpected
239
WING BOLT
SPACER CONE
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５１：２５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２４２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
key to START (III):
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
When you turn the ignition switch to
START (III), you do not hear the
normal noise of the engine trying to
start. You may hear a clicking sound
or series of clicks, or nothing at all.
Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
the clutch pedal must be pushed
all the way to the floor or the
starter will not operate. With an
automatic transmission, it must be
in Park or Neutral.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Turn on the headlights, and check
their brightness. If the headlights
are very dim or do not come on at
all, the battery is discharged. See
on page .
Store the wheel cover or center
cap in the trunk. Make sure it does
not get scratched or damaged.
Check these things:
19.
242
If the Engine Won’t Start Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
Jump Starting
Changing a Flat Tire (Canadian Model), If the Engine Won’t Start
240
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５１：３５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２４３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn the ignition switch to START
(III). If the headlights do not dim,
check the condition of the fuses. If
thefusesareOK,thereis
probably something wrong with
the electrical circuit for the
ignition switch or starter motor.
You will need a qualified
technician to determine the
problem (see
on page ).
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to START (III), but
the engine does not run.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page ).
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is dis-
charged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery connections (see page
). You can then try jump
starting the vehicle from a booster
battery (see page ).
250
225
242
167
78
252
250
Emergency Towing
The Starter Operates Normally
Starting the
Engine
Emergency
Towing
IftheEngineWon’tStart
Taking Care of the Unexpected
241
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５１：４４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２４４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
＋
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
To jump start your vehicle:
You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it.
The numbers in the illustration show
the order to connect the jumper
cable.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
Turn off all the electrical acces-
sories: heater, A/C, climate
control, stereo system, lights, etc.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive ( ) terminal on the
booster battery.
1.
2.
3.
Jump Starting
242
BOOSTER
BATTERY
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a frozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５１：５５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２４５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper
cables away from each other and
any metal on the vehicle until
everything is disconnected.
Otherwise, you may cause an
electrical short.
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
7.
6.
5.
4.
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
243
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５２：０２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２４６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
Turn off all accessories, and turn
on the hazard warning indicators.
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
The pointer of the vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange. If it climbs to the red
mark, you should determine the
reason (hot day, driving up a steep
hill, etc.).
If your vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
250
Emergency
Towing
IftheEngineOverheats
244
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to your engine.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５２：１１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２４７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
Start the engine and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum (climate control to
FULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Add
coolant to the radiator up to the
base of the filler neck. If you do
not have the proper coolant
mixture available, you can add
plain water. Remember to have
the cooling system drained and
refilled with the proper mixture as
soon as you can.
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and watch
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see
on page ).
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
If you do not find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera-
ture gauge, or lower, before check-
ing the radiator.
7.
6. 8.
9.
10.
11.
250
Emergency
Towing
IftheEngineOverheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
245
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５２：２１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２４８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Start the engine and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
outwithin10seconds,turnoffthe
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see on page
).
This indicator should never come on
when the engine is running. If it
starts flashing or stays on, the oil
pressure has dropped very low or
lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible and you should
take immediate action. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
1.
2.
3.
4.
155
201
250
Emergency Towing
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
246
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can safely get
the vehicle stopped.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５２：２９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２４９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the charging system indicator
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, the battery is not being
charged.
If the indicator comes on while
driving, it means one of the engine’s
emission control systems may have a
problem. Even though you may feel
no difference in your vehicle’s
performance, continued operation
may cause serious damage.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to your dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Malfunction Indicator LampCharging System Indicator
Charging System Indicator, Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
247
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
０４／１０／３０ １０：１５：４０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２５０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the indicator remains on or the
fuel cap was not loose or missing,
have the vehicle checked by the
dealer as soon as possible.
If your vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It takes at least
three days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the cause of this indicator
coming on could be a loose or
missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap
or replace it. Tightening the cap will
not make the indicator turn off
immediately; it takes at least three
days of normal driving.
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition to ON (II), without starting
the engine. The Malfunction
Indicator Lamp will come on for 20
seconds. If it then goes off, the
readiness codes are set. If it blinks 5
times, the readiness codes are not
set. If possible, do not take your
vehicle for a state emissions test
until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to
for more information (see page ).268
Readiness Codes
State Emissions Testing
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
248
If you keep driving with the
Malf unction Indicator Lamp on, you
can damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties. This indicator may also
come on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５２：４７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２５１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
If the ABS indicator comes on with
this indicator, have the vehicle
inspected by your dealer
immediately.
If this indicator comes on while
driving, the brake fluid level is
probably low in the reservoir. Press
lightly on the brake pedal to see if it
feels normal. If it does, check the
brake fluid level the next time you
stop at a service station (see page
). If the fluid level is low, take
the vehicle to your dealer and have
the brake system inspected for leaks
or worn brake pads.
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see
on page ).
209
250
Emergency
Towing
Brake System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
249
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
U.S. model
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５２：５４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２５２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
an organization. Never tow your
vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is
very dangerous.
Therearetwowaystotowyour
vehicle.
The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck.
The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front or rear) and lift
them off the ground. The other two
tires remain on the ground.
If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels on
the ground, do the following:
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
ShifttoD,thentoN.
Turn off the engine.
Flat-bed Equipment
Wheel-lift Equipment
This is the best way to trans-
port your vehicle.
This is
an acceptable way to tow your
vehicle.
Emergency Towing
250
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine (automatic transmission), your
vehicle must be transported with the
f ront wheels of f the ground.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５３：０６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２５３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
With the front wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speedbelow35mph(55km/h).
If you decide to tow your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground,
make sure you use a properly-
designed and attached tow bar.
Prepare the vehicle for towing as
described above, and leave the
ignition switch in Accessory (I) so
the steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure the radio and any items
plugged into the accessory power
socket are turned off so they do not
rundownthebattery.
If your vehicle is equipped with a
front spoiler, remove it before
towing so it is not damaged.
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
251
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I), and
make sure the steering wheel turns
f reely bef ore you begin towing.
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５３：１２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２５４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The interior fuse box is on the
driver’s lower left side. To remove
the fuse box lid, pull it toward you
and take it out of its hinges.
The under-hood fuse box is located
near the back of the engine compart-
ment on the driver’s side. To open it,
pushthetabsasshown.
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
youshouldcheckforisablownfuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
and , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that component. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
not the cause. Replace any blown
fuses and check if the device works.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0). Make sure the headlights and
all other accessories are off.
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
1.
2.
255 256
Checking and Replacing Fuses
Fuses
252
INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD
TAB
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５３：２０ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２５５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking at the wire inside.
Removing these fuses requires a
Phillips-head screwdriver.
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided in the under-hood
fuse box.
Look for a burned wire inside the
fuse. If it is burned, replace it with
one of the spare fuses of the same
rating or lower.
3. 4.
5.
CONTINUED
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
253
BLOWN
BLOWN
BLOWN
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５３：２９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２５６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits with
the fuse puller provided in the under-
hood fuse box. Make sure you can
do without that circuit temporarily
(such as the accessory power socket
or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified mechanic.
6.
Fuses
254
FUSE PULLER
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５３：３５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２５７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
−
No. No.Amps. Circuits Protected
No. Amps. Circuits Protected
Circuits ProtectedAmps.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
10 A
30 A
10 A
15 A
10 A
Left Headlight Low
Rear Defroster Coil
Left Headlight Hi
Small Light
Right Headlight Hi
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
30 A
7.5 A
20 A
40 A
40 A
15 A
30 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
120 A
70 A
50 A
50 A
Cooling Fan
MG. Clutch
Horn, Stop
Rear Defroster
Back Up, ACC
Hazard
TCS Motor
TCS
Ignition Coil, DRL (Canada)
Power Seats, Seat Heaters
Heater Motor
Battery
EPS
BIG1Main
Power Window Main
Right Headlight Low
Back Up
FI ECU
Condenser fan
Not Used
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
20 A
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
255
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５３：４５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２５８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
No.
No. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits ProtectedAmps.
Amps. Circuits Protected
: On Canadian model
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DrivebyWire
Ignition Coil
Day Light
Laf Heater
Radio
Interior Light
Back-Up Lights
Door Lock
Front Accessory Sockets
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
7.5 A
30 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
IG OPDS
IG Wiper
Not Used
Not Used
Driver’s Power Seat (Slide)
Heated Seat
Driver’s Power Seat
(Recline)
15 A
15 A
10 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
10 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
Not Used
IG ACG
IG Fuel Pump
IG Washer
IG Meter
IG SRS
IGP
Power Window (Left Rear)
Power Window (Right Rear)
Power Window (Passenger)
Power Window (Driver)
Not Used
Hybrid HAC
IG HAC
Not Used
ACC
Not Used
Rear Accessory Socket
STS
ACM
IMA
Fuses
256
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
０４／１１／０８ ０９：３４：０８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２５９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle, and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 258
................................Specifications . 260
DOT Tire Quality Grading
.....................(U.S.Vehicles) .262
Uniform Tire Quality
..................................Grading . 262
.................................Treadwear . 262
......................................Traction . 262
.............................Temperature . 263
.................................Tire Labeling . 264
.......................Emissions Controls . 265
.....................The Clean Air Act . 265
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 265
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 265
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 265
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 266
....................PGM-FI System . 266
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 266
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
...................(EGR) System . 266
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 266
....................Replacement Parts . 266
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 267
..............State Emissions Testing . 268
Technical Information
Technical Information
257
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５３：５９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２６０
Main Menu
The Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
Honda dealer uses to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes. It is
also necessary for licensing and
insuring your vehicle. The easiest
placetofindtheVINisonaplate
fastened to the top of the dashboard.
Youcanseeitbylookingthrough
the windshield on the driver’s side. It
is also on the Certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
Certification label.
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
Identification Numbers
258
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
CERTIFICATION LABEL
０５／０１／０６ １８：２５：０３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２６１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
259
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
ENGINE NUMBER
０５／０１／１１ １１：４２：０９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２６２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
260
Dimensions
Weights
Air Conditioning
Capacities
Capacities
HFC-134a (R-134a)
16 18 oz (450 500 g)
107.9 in (2,740 mm)
61.1 in (1,553 mm)
61.2 in (1,554 mm)
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
SE-10Y
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
Fuel tank
17.09 US gal (64.7 )
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
1.77 US gal (6.7 )
2.22 US gal (8.4 )
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
5.3 US qt (5.0 )
2.6 US qt (2.5
)
4.8 US qt (4.5
)
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity: 0.16 US gal (0.6
)
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
3.6 US qt (3.4
)
8.5 US qt (8.0 )
189.5 in (4,813 mm)
71.7 in (1,820 mm)
57.2 in (1,453 mm)
Approx.
Front
Rear
Change
Total
Change
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Change
Total
U.S. Vehicles
Canada Vehicles
1:
2:
1
2
０４／１０／０７ １０：５６：３２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２６３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
Technical Information
261
Battery
Fuses
Engine
Alignment
Lights
Tires
12 V 60 W (HB3)
12 V 51 W (HB4)
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
21 W
21/5 W
2CP
21 W
21 W
3CP
8W
12 V 21 W
8W
12 V 5 W
12 V 2 CP
12 V 1.1 W
Capacity 12 V 52 AH/5 HR
Interior
Under-hood
SOHC i-VTEC 6-cylinder (V6),
gasoline engine
3.39 x 3.39 in (86.0 x 86.0 mm)
182.8 cu-in (2,997 cm )
10.5 : 1
IZFR6K-11
SKJ20DR-M11
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°
1°
3°15’
12 V
Headlights
Front side marker/Parking/
Turn signal light
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/Taillights
Taillights
High-mount brake light
Back-up lights
License plate light
Front ceiling lights
Center ceiling light
Trunk light
Door courtesy light
Vanity mirror lights
Size
Pressure
P215/60R16 94V
T135/90D15
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )See page 256 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door on each side of the
dashboard.
See page 255 or the fuse box
cover.
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
High
Low
NGK:
DENSO:
(Amber)
Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Spare
: Canadian model
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５４：５３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２６４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
All passenger vehicle tires must
conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these
grades.
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
262
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５５：０３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２６５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not over-
loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by
law.
Temperature A,B,C
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Technical Information
263
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５５：０８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２６６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Following is an example
of tire size with an explanation of
what each component means.
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
Vehicletype(Pindicates
passenger vehicle).
Tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
Rim diameter in inches.
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
a group of numbers and letters that
look like the following example TIN.
This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
Tire type code.
Date of manufacture.
The maximum air
pressurethetirecan
hold.
The maximum load the
tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.
P
R
V
16
DOT
B97R
FW6X
2202
205
60
91
Max Press
Max Load
Tire Labeling
Tire Size
Tire Identification Number
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
Tire Labeling
264
P205/60R16 91V
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５５：２６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２６７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Con-
trolling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environ-
ment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contri-
bute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Emissions Controls
Technical Information
265
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５５：３７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２６８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection. It has three
subsystems: air intake, engine
control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM) in
automatic transmission vehicles or
the engine control module (ECM) in
manual transmission vehicles uses
various sensors to determine how
much air is going into the engine. It
then controls how much fuel to inject
under all operating conditions. The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
qualitypartsmayincreasethe
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
2
2
Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts
PGM-FI System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Ignition Timing Control System
Emissions Controls
266
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５５：４９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２６９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Keep the engine tuned-up.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Information
267
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
０５／０１／１１ １１：４３：０７ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２７０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely full (around
3/4).
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 20° and
95°F.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 8
hours or more.
Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (about 3 minutes).
Testing of Readiness Codes
State Emissions Testing
268
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５６：０４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２７１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D. Do not use the cruise control.
When traffic allows, drive for 90
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
State Emissions Testing
Technical Information
269
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５６：０９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２７２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
270
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５６：１１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２７３
Main Menu
....Customer Service Information . 272
....................Warranty Coverages . 273
Reporting Safety Defects
............................(U.S. Vehicle) . 274
.....................Authorized Manuals . 275
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty and Customer Relations
271
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５６：１５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２７４
Main Menu
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners:
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Service Office.
258
Customer Service Information
272
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816
(787) 250-4318
０５／０１／１１ １１：４３：１５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２７５
Table of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty manual for exact
information.
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
coveredfortheusefullifeofthe
vehicle.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty manual for
details.
covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2005 Honda Warranty Information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty infor-
mation is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2005 Warranty
Manual that came with your vehicle.
this warranty gives up
to 100 percent credit toward a
replacement battery.
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Rust Perf oration Limited Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Warranty and Customer Relations
273
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５６：３６ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２７６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA), in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either
call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
Washington D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
274
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５６：４２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２７７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
２
０
０
５
Ｈ
Ｏ
Ｎ
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356
Go online at
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
(credit card orders only)
Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian
owners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
Authorized Manuals
275
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
OR
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
Form Description
2005 Honda Accord Hybrid
Service Manual Base Book
2005 Honda Accord Hybrid
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2005 Honda Accord Hybrid
Body Repair Manual
2005 Honda Accord Hybrid
Owner’s Manual
2005 Honda Accord Hybrid
Navigation Manual
2005 Honda Accord Hybrid
Honda Service History
2005 Honda Accord Hybrid
Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
Price
Each
$70.00
$50.00
$44.00
$34.00
$29.00
$12.00
$12.00
FREE
Publication
Form Number
61SDR00
61SDR00EL
61SDR31
31SDR600
31SDR700
31SDRM00
31SDRQ00
HON-R
PUBLICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE MODEL
Name Year
Qty
Price
Each
Total
Price
GRAND TOTAL
HANDLING CHARGE
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
TOTAL MATERIAL
$6.95
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.
www. helminc. com
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５６：５５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２７８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Ｓ
Ｈ
Ｉ
Ｐ
Ｔ
Ｏ
Ｐ
Ａ
Ｙ
Ｍ
Ｅ
Ｎ
Ｔ
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
stand.
This manual complements the service manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
Authorized Manuals
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
276
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
Customer Name
Attention
Apartment Number
State & Zip Code
City
Daytime Telephone Number
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
Street Address No P.O. Box Number
()
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
０４／１０／０１ ２２：５７：０４ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２７９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 54, 247
............................Jump Starting . 242
..............................Maintenance . 225
............................Specifications . 260
..............................Before Driving . 151
........................................Belts, Seat . 10
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 177
.............Break-in, New Linings . 152
....................Bulb Replacement . 214
...........................................Fluid . 209
.........................................Parking . 93
.........................System Indicator . 54
........................Wear Indicators . 176
.............................Braking System . 176
........................Break-in, New Car . 152
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 74
........................Brights, Headlights . 72
Bulb Replacement
..............................Brake Lights . 214
................Front Parking Lights . 213
.................................Headlights . 210
.........High-mount Brake Light . 215
............................Specifications . 260
....................Turn Signal Lights . 213
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 210
............................Capacities Chart . 260
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 49
.............................Carrying Cargo . 160
..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii
...................................CD Changer . 120
..............................CD Player . 119, 120
........................Certification Label . 258
............................................Chains . 224
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 237
Changing Oil
........................................How to . 203
.............................When to . 194, 195
....................Charge/Assist Gauge . 68
....................................Accessories . 158
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.......................................Position) . 79
...............Accessory Power Socket . 97
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 201
...................................Airbag (SRS) . 11
..........Airbag System Components . 23
............................Air Conditioning . 103
.........................................Usage . 105
.......................................Air Intake . 163
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 220
...................Air Vent in the Trunk . 163
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 55, 177
...................................Operation . 177
.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 76
............................................Armrest . 85
................................Audio System . 112
................................Auto Idle Stop . 173
...............Auto Idle Stop Indicator . 174
.............Automatic Speed Control . 142
..............Automatic Transmission . 168
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 260
.......................................Shifting . 168
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 168
................Shift Lever Positions . 168
....................Shift Lock Release . 171
Index
A
B
C
INDEX
I
０５／０１／０６ １８：２９：１３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２８０
Main Menu
................DANGER, Explanation of . ii
...................................Dashboard . 4, 52
................Daytime Running Lights . 74
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 274
................Defogger, Rear Window . 75
....................................Dimensions . 260
...............Dimming the Headlights . 72
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 208
..................................Engine Oil . 155
..........................Directional Signals . 72
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 176
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 204
Doors
..............Locking and Unlocking . 80
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 262
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7
...........................................Driving . 165
....................................Economy . 157
..........Dual Temperature Control . 109
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 216
..............................Economy, Fuel . 157
Electronically Controlled Power
Steering System (ECPS)
.......................................Indicator . 60
............Emergencies on the Road . 229
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 242
...........Brake System Indicator . 249
................Changing a Flat Tire . 237
.....Charging System Indicator . 247
..................Checking the Fuses . 252
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 246
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 247
..................Overheated Engine . 244
...........................Emergency Brake . 93
......................Emergency Flashers . 75
......................Emergency Towing . 250
.......................Emissions Controls . 265
Engine
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 68
Malfunction Indicator
......................................Lamp . 247
..............Oil Pressure Indicator . 246
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 201
...............................Overheating . 244
...Charging System Indicator . 54, 247
..............Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 60
............Checklist, Before Driving . 166
..................Childproof Door Locks . 81
.......................................Child Seats . 31
...........Lower Anchorage Points . 40
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 44
..............Climate Control Sensors . 111
.........................Clock, Setting the . 140
........................CO in the Exhaust . 280
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 167
..............................Compact Spare . 236
...................Console Compartment . 97
.................Consumer Information . 272
.............Controls, Instruments and . 51
Coolant
........................................Adding . 206
....................................Checking . 156
.........................Proper Solution . 206
...................Temperature Gauge . 68
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 265
............Cruise Control Operation . 142
.............Customer Service Office . 272
Index
DE
II
０５／０１／０６ １８：２９：１８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２８１
Main Menu
CONTINUED
............................Specifications . 260
............................Speed Limiter . 170
.........................................Starting . 77
...................Engine Speed Limiter . 170
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 265
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 49
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 18
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 157
.........................................Gasoline . 152
...........................................Gauge . 69
................Octane Requirement . 152
........................Tank, Filling the . 153
................Gas Station Procedures . 153
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 68
...............................................Fuel . 69
Gearshift Lever Positions
..........Automatic Transmission . 168
........................................Glove Box . 98
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 258
Ignition
..............................................Keys . 77
...........................................Switch . 79
............Timing Control System . 266
...................................Fan, Interior . 102
...........................................Features . 99
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 153
Filter
.........................Dust and Pollen . 216
...............................................Oil . 203
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 75
Flat Tire
....................................Repairing . 230
....................................Changing . 237
.......................................Floor Mat . 216
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 208
..........................................Brake . 209
..................Windshield Washer . 205
..........................Four-way Flashers . 75
.................................................Fuel . 152
...............................Cap Message . 60
.....................Economy Indicator . 62
......................Fill Door and Cap . 153
...........................................Gauge . 69
................Octane Requirement . 152
........................Tank, Filling the . 153
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 252
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 210
..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 75
........................................Headlights . 72
........................................Aiming . 210
..............Automatic Lighting Off . 73
............Daytime Running Lights . 74
............Low Beams, Turning on . 72
.........................Reminder Chime . 72
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 210
...................................Turning on . 72
..............................Head Restraints . 88
.....................Heating and Cooling . 100
HomeLink Universal
................................Transceiver . 145
..Hood, Opening and Closing the . 154
Index
F
G
H
I
INDEX
III
０５／０１／０６ １８：２９：２５ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２８２
Main Menu
....................IMA System Indicator . 60
........................Immobilizer System . 78
.........Important Safety Precautions . 8
.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 54
...............................Infant Restraint . 36
......................................Infant Seats . 36
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 44
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 219
...................................Inside Mirror . 89
.............................Inspection, Tire . 221
....................Installing a Child Seat . 40
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 44
.............................Using LATCH . 40
............................Instrument Panel . 53
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 74
........................................Introduction . i
.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 238
.......................................Jack, Tire . 237
................................Jump Starting . 242
..................................................Keys . 77
.......................Label, Certification . 258
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 72
........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 20
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 210
.......................................Indicator . 57
.......................................Parking . 213
..................................Turn Signal . 57
....................................Load Limits . 161
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 79
Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 79
............................Fuel Fill Door . 153
....................................Glove Box . 98
....................Lockout Prevention . 80
.................................Power Door . 80
...........................................Trunk . 84
........................Low Coolant Level . 156
...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 168
...........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 54
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 260
.........................................Luggage . 160
..................................Maintenance . 189
...Owner Maintenance Checks . 193
........................................Record . 196
......................Required Indicator . 61
..........................................Safety . 190
.............................Schedule . 194-195
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 247
...............................Meters, Gauges . 63
..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 89
.................................Modifications . 159
...................Neutral Gear Position . 169
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 152
.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 168
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 258
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 152
.........................................Odometer . 64
Index
J
K
LM
N
O
IV
０５／０１／０６ １８：２９：３２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２８３
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Oil
........................Change, How to . 203
...............Change, When to . 194-195
......................Checking Engine . 155
..............Pressure Indicator . 54, 246
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 202
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 79
..............................Outside Mirrors . 89
.....................Outside Temperature . 64
....................Overheating, Engine . 244
.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 193
..............Panel Brightness Control . 74
........................Park Gear Position . 168
.................................Parking Brake . 93
.................................Parking Lights . 72
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 267
..................................Parking Tips . 175
.............................PGM-FI System . 266
...................................Pollen Filter . 216
....................Power Mirror Heaters . 90
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18
........................Protecting Children . 31
Protecting Infants and Small
.......................................Children . 36
...........Protecting Larger Children . 45
.....................Using Booster Seat . 46
...................Radiator Overheating . 244
Radio/CD Sound
........................................System . 112
..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 214
............................Rear View Mirror . 89
.................Rear Window Defogger . 75
.........Reclining the Seat Backs . 87, 88
.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 168
.............................Reminder Lights . 53
.......................Remote Transmitter . 81
Replacement Information
................Engine Oil and Filter . 203
..........................................Fuses . 252
................................Light Bulbs . 210
.............................Schedule . 194-195
...........................................Tires . 222
.............................Wiper Blades . 217
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 21
.................Reserve Tank, Coolant . 206
...............................Restraint, Child . 31
..................Reverse Gear Position . 163
................................Rotation, Tire . 222
......................................Safety Belts . 10
............Safety Defects, Reporting . 274
.................................Safety Features . 9
.........................................Airbags . 11
.....................................Seat Belts . 10
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 50
...............................Safety Messages . ii
................................Satellite Radio . 132
Index
P
RS
INDEX
V
０５／０１／０６ １８：２９：３８ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２８４
Main Menu
.........................................Seat Belts . 10
...............Additional Information . 20
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 21
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20
................................Maintenance . 21
Reminder Light and
................................Beeper . 20, 54
...................System Components . 20
...............Use During Pregnancy . 18
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20
........................Seats, Adjusting the . 86
............................Security System . 141
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 38
.........................Select/Reset Knob . 74
...............................Serial Number . 258
....................Service Intervals . 194-195
.............................Service Manual . 275
...........Service Station Procedure . 153
..........................Setting the Clock . 140
.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 168
........................Shift Lock Release . 171
..............................Side Airbags . 11, 26
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 26
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 28
................Side Curtain Airbags . 11, 27
How Your Side Curtain
..........................Airbags Work . 27
...............................Signaling Turns . 72
.....................................Snow Tires . 223
................................Sound System . 112
Spare Tire
......................................Inflating . 236
............................Specifications . 261
....................Specifications Charts . 260
................................Speed Control . 142
................................Speed Limiter . 170
..........SRS, Additional Information . 20
...Additional Safety Precautions . 30
.............................Airbag Service . 29
How the Passenger Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 28
How Your SRS Indicator
.......................................Works . 28
How Your Front Airbags
.......................................Works . 24
How Your Side Airbags
.......................................Works . 26
........................SRS Components . 20
.............................SRS Indicator . 28, 55
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 79
.......................Starting the Engine . 167
................With a Dead Battery . 242
........Steam Coming from Engine . 244
Steering Wheel
..................................Adjustment . 76
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 79
...................Stereo Sound System . 112
..........................................Sun Visor . 94
..........................Sunglasses Holder . 98
Supplemental Restraint
................................System . 11, 23
......................................Servicing . 29
.........................SRS Indicator . 28, 55
...................System Components . 23
..................................Synthetic Oil . 202
......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 214
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 229
Technical Descriptions
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 262
.....Emissions Control Systems . 265
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 266
.......................Temperature Gauge . 68
Index
T
VI
０５／０１／０６ １８：２９：４３ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２８５
Main Menu
CONTINUED
..............Tether Anchorage Points . 44
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 284
..........................Time, Setting the . 140
....................................Timing Belt . 209
....................................Tire Chains . 224
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 237
.................................Tire Labeling . 264
...............................................Tires . 219
..............................Air Pressure . 220
.........................Checking Wear . 221
..........................Compact Spare . 236
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 262
......................................Inflation . 219
..................................Inspection . 221
...................................Replacing . 222
......................................Rotating . 222
...........................................Snow . 223
............................Specifications . 261
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 237
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 182
................Emergency Wrecker . 250
..............Traction Control System . 179
...TCS Activation Indicator . 56, 180
......................TCS Indicator . 56, 180
.........................TCS Off Switch . 180
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
..............................Automatic . 208
...........................Fluid Selection . 200
..............Identification Number . 258
.............Shifting the Automatic . 168
.....................................Treadwear . 262
.......................................Trip Meter . 65
................................................Trunk . 84
....................Emergency Opener . 85
.................................Opening the . 84
...................Open Monitor Light . 56
....................................Turn Signals . 72
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 229
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 262
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 152
.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 216
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 204
..................................Vanity Mirror . 94
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 161
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 260
....Vehicle Identification Number . 262
.............................Vehicle Storage . 226
.................................................VIN . 258
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 202
.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 50
....................Warranty Coverages . 273
Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 205
.....................................Operation . 71
Wheels
...............Adjusting the Steering . 76
............Alignment and Balance . 221
..........................Compact Spare . 236
......................................Wrench . 238
Windows
..................Operating the Power . 90
...........................Rear, Defogger . 75
Index
U
V
W
INDEX
VII
０５／０１／０６ １８：２９：４９ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２８６
Main Menu
Windshield
.......................................Cleaning . 71
.......................................Washers . 71
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 217
.....................................Operation . 71
....................................Worn Tires . 221
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 250
Index
VIII
０５／０１／０６ １８：２９：５２ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２８７
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Brake Fluid:
Tire Pressure:
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
17.09 US gal (64.7
)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 86 or higher.
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
aDEXRON
III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see
pages and ).208 209
209
201
０４／１０／３０ １０：１６：１１ ３１ＳＤＲ６００ ０２８９
Main Menu
